Heat Exchangers: Design, Operation ... - 123SeminarsOnly
Heat Exchangers: Design, Operation ... - 123SeminarsOnly
Heat Exchangers: Design, Operation ... - 123SeminarsOnly
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
<strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong>:<br />
<strong>Design</strong>, <strong>Operation</strong>, Maintenance and Enhancement<br />
Ali A. Rabah (BSc., MSc., PhD., MSES)<br />
Department of chemical engineering,<br />
University of Khartoum,<br />
P.O. Box 321,<br />
Khartoum, Sudan<br />
Email: rabass@hotmail.com
2 Table of contents<br />
Table of contents<br />
1 Introduction 8<br />
1.1 Programm outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8<br />
1.2 Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10<br />
2 Classification of heat exchangers 12<br />
2.1 Classification by construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14<br />
2.1.1 Tubular heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14<br />
2.2 Double pipe heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15<br />
2.3 Spiral tube heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16<br />
2.4 Shell and tube heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16<br />
2.4.1 Fixed tubesheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17<br />
2.4.2 U-tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17<br />
2.4.3 Floating head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18<br />
2.5 Plate heat exchangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19<br />
2.5.1 Gasketed plate heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20<br />
2.5.2 Welded- and Brazed-Plate exchanger (W. PHE and BHE) . . . . . 22<br />
2.5.3 Spiral Plate Exchanger (SPHE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23<br />
2.6 Extended surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26<br />
2.6.1 Plate fin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26<br />
2.6.2 Tube fin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27<br />
3 Code and standards 28<br />
3.1 TEMA <strong>Design</strong>ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28<br />
3.2 Classification by construction STHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33<br />
3.2.1 Fixed tube sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33<br />
3.2.2 U-Tube <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35<br />
3.2.3 Floating Head <strong>Design</strong>s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37<br />
3.3 Shell Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41<br />
3.4 Tube side construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42<br />
3.4.1 Tube-Side Header: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42<br />
3.4.2 Tube-Side Passes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42<br />
3.4.3 Tubes Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43<br />
3.4.4 Tube arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46<br />
3.4.5 Tube side passes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47<br />
3.5 Shell side construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47<br />
3.5.1 Shell Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47<br />
3.5.2 Shell-Side Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48<br />
3.6 Baffles and tube bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48<br />
3.6.1 The tube bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Table of contents 3<br />
3.6.2 Baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48<br />
3.6.3 Vapor Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51<br />
3.6.4 Tube-Bundle Bypassing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51<br />
3.6.5 Tie Rods and Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52<br />
3.6.6 Tubesheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52<br />
4 Basic <strong>Design</strong> Equations of <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong> 55<br />
4.1 LMTD-Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55<br />
4.1.1 Logarithmic mean temperature different . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56<br />
4.1.2 Correction Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57<br />
4.1.3 Overall heat transfer coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59<br />
4.1.4 <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61<br />
4.1.5 Fouling factor (hid, hod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61<br />
4.2 ε- NTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61<br />
4.3 Link between LMTD and NTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64<br />
4.4 The Theta Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64<br />
5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong> 66<br />
5.1 <strong>Design</strong> Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66<br />
5.1.1 Fluid Stream Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66<br />
5.1.2 Shell and tube velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66<br />
5.1.3 Stream temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67<br />
5.1.4 Pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67<br />
5.1.5 Fluid physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67<br />
5.2 <strong>Design</strong> data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68<br />
5.3 Tubeside design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69<br />
5.3.1 <strong>Heat</strong>-transfer coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69<br />
5.3.2 Pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70<br />
5.4 Shell side design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72<br />
5.4.1 Shell configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72<br />
5.4.2 Tube layout patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73<br />
5.4.3 Tube pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73<br />
5.4.4 Baffling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74<br />
5.4.5 Equalize cross-flow and window velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76<br />
5.4.6 Shellside stream analysis (Flow pattern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76<br />
5.4.7 <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient and pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77<br />
5.4.8 <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78<br />
5.4.9 Pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78<br />
5.5 <strong>Design</strong> Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79<br />
6 Specification sheet 80<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
4 Table of contents<br />
6.1 Information included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80<br />
6.2 Information not included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80<br />
6.3 <strong>Operation</strong> conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80<br />
6.4 Bid evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81<br />
6.4.1 Factor to be consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81<br />
7 Storage, Installation, <strong>Operation</strong> and Maintenance 83<br />
7.1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83<br />
7.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85<br />
7.2.1 Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85<br />
7.2.2 Installation at Jobsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86<br />
7.3 <strong>Operation</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87<br />
8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement 91<br />
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91<br />
8.2 Repair vs. Replace - Factors To Consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92<br />
8.3 <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger maintenance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93<br />
8.4 Repair option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94<br />
8.4.1 Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94<br />
8.4.2 Sleeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95<br />
8.4.3 Tube Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100<br />
8.5 Replacement option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103<br />
8.5.1 Retubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103<br />
8.5.2 Rebundling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104<br />
8.5.3 Complete replacement (New unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104<br />
8.6 Conclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105<br />
9 Troubleshooting 106<br />
9.1 <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers’ problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106<br />
9.2 Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106<br />
9.2.1 Costs of fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106<br />
9.2.2 Facts about fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107<br />
9.2.3 Types of Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107<br />
9.2.4 Fouling Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107<br />
9.2.5 Conditions Influencing Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107<br />
9.2.6 Fouling control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108<br />
9.2.7 Fouling cleaning methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108<br />
9.3 Leakage/Rupture of the <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109<br />
9.3.1 Cost of leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109<br />
9.3.2 Cause of differential thermal expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109<br />
9.4 Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Table of contents 5<br />
9.4.1 Corrosion effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110<br />
9.4.2 Causes of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110<br />
9.4.3 Type of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110<br />
9.4.4 Stress corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110<br />
9.4.5 Galvanic corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110<br />
9.4.6 Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111<br />
9.4.7 Uniform or rust corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111<br />
9.4.8 Crevice corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111<br />
9.4.9 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112<br />
9.4.10 Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112<br />
9.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112<br />
9.6 Past failure incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113<br />
9.6.1 Ethylene Oxide Redistillation Column Explosion: . . . . . . . . . . 113<br />
9.6.2 Brittle Fracture of a <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113<br />
9.6.3 Cold Box Explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114<br />
9.7 Failure scenarios and design solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114<br />
9.8 Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116<br />
9.8.1 Use of Potential <strong>Design</strong> Solutions Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116<br />
9.8.2 Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117<br />
9.9 Troubleshooting Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />
9.9.1 Shell side temperature uncontrolled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />
9.9.2 Shell assumed banana-shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118<br />
9.9.3 Steam condenser performing below design capacity . . . . . . . . . 119<br />
9.9.4 Steam heat exchanger flooded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119<br />
10 Unresolved problems in the heat exchangers design 120<br />
10.1 Future trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120<br />
Bibliography 121<br />
A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient 131<br />
A.1 Single phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131<br />
A.1.1 Inside tube: Turbulent flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131<br />
A.1.2 Inside tube: Laminar flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131<br />
A.1.3 Shell side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131<br />
A.1.4 Plate heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133<br />
A.2 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133<br />
A.2.1 Condensation on vertical plate or outside vertical tube . . . . . . . 133<br />
A.2.2 Condensation on external horizontal tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133<br />
A.2.3 Condensation on banks of horizontal tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133<br />
A.2.4 Condensation inside horizontal tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
6 Table of contents<br />
A.3 Two phase flow: Pure fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134<br />
A.3.1 Steiner [140] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134<br />
A.3.2 Kattan et al. [77] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137<br />
A.3.3 Kandlikar [70] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138<br />
A.3.4 Chen [19] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139<br />
A.3.5 Gungor and Winterton [52] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140<br />
A.3.6 Shah [130] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140<br />
A.3.7 Schrock and Grossman [129] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141<br />
A.3.8 Dembi et al. [30] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141<br />
A.3.9 Klimenko [84] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141<br />
A.3.10 Jung et al. [64] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142<br />
A.4 Two phase flow: Mixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142<br />
A.4.1 Steiner [140] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142<br />
A.4.2 Kandlikar [71] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143<br />
A.4.3 Bennett and Chen [8] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143<br />
A.4.4 Palen [111] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143<br />
A.4.5 Jung et al. [64] correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144<br />
B Pressure drop 145<br />
B.1 Single phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145<br />
B.2 Two phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145<br />
B.2.1 Friedel [42] model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147<br />
B.2.2 Lockhart and Martinelli [91] model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147<br />
B.2.3 Chisholm [22] model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148<br />
C Physical properties 149<br />
C.1 Physical properties: Pure fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149<br />
C.1.1 Specific heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149<br />
C.1.2 Vapor pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149<br />
C.1.3 Liquid viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149<br />
C.1.4 Vapor dynamic viscosity VDI-Wärmeatlas [157] . . . . . . . . . . . 149<br />
C.1.5 Dynamic viscosity of Fenghour et al. [40] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151<br />
C.1.6 Surface tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152<br />
C.1.7 Thermal conductivity for liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152<br />
C.1.8 Thermal conductivity for gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152<br />
C.1.9 Specific enthalpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153<br />
C.2 Physical properties: Mixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153<br />
C.2.1 Liquid dynamic viscosity of mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153<br />
C.2.2 Vapor dynamic viscosity of mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153<br />
C.2.3 Liquid thermal conductivity of mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Table of contents 7<br />
C.2.4 Vapor thermal conductivity of mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154<br />
C.2.5 Surface tension of mixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155<br />
C.3 Software packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8 1 Introduction<br />
1 Introduction<br />
<strong>Heat</strong> exchanger is an important and expensive item of equipment that is used almost in<br />
every industry (oil and petrochemical, sugar, food, pharmaceutical and power industry).<br />
A better understanding of the basic principles of heat transfer and fluid flow and their<br />
application to the design and operation of heat exchangers that you gain from this course<br />
will enable you to improve their efficiency and extend their life. You understand how to use<br />
the applicable API, TEMA and ASME recommended practices, standards and codes for<br />
heat exchangers. This will enable you to communicate with the designers, manufacturers<br />
and bidders of heat exchangers. You will understand how to avoid fouling, corrosion and<br />
failure and leak problems by your design. You will also be able to survey and troubleshoot<br />
heat exchangers and assist in performing inspection, cleaning, and maintenance. You will<br />
be exposed to recent development and future trend in heat exchangers.<br />
The course includes worked examples to reinforce the key learning as well as a demonstration<br />
of mechanical design and challenging problems encountered in the operation of<br />
heat exchangers.<br />
Objectives<br />
• To learn the classification, code and standards (API, TEMA,...) and selection procedure<br />
for heat exchangers.<br />
• To review the thermal and mechanical design of heat exchangers.<br />
• To learn the installation, operation and maintenance procedure for heat exchanger.<br />
• To acquire information that will enable decisions to be made on the repair and<br />
refurbishment of aging equipment as well as repair vs. replacement options.<br />
• To learn techniques of failure elimination and appropriate maintenance and troubleshooting<br />
procedures.<br />
• To delineate the factors that lead to overall economically advantageous decisions.<br />
Who should attend: Project engineers, process engineers and plant engineers in the oil,<br />
chemical, sugar, power, and other industries who requires a wider and deeper appreciation<br />
of heat exchangers design, performance and operation. The detailed review of thermal<br />
and mechanical design is particularly useful to plant and maintenance engineers as well<br />
as to those generally knowledgeable in the subject, but who require a refresher or update.<br />
Codes and standards are useful for project engineer to help him communicate with<br />
manufacturers, designers and bidders of heat exchangers. Troubleshooting procedures are<br />
important for process engineers. Participants will be taken through an intensive primer<br />
of heat transfer principles as applicable to heat exchangers.<br />
1.1 Programm outline<br />
1. DAY I: HEAT EXCHANGERS CLASSIFICATION APPLICATION, CODE<br />
AND STANDARDS<br />
• Classification according to construction (tubular, plate, finned, enhanced)<br />
• Classification according to service (cooler, heater, condenser, reboiler, etc..)<br />
• Construction, applications, range and limitations and sizes<br />
• Code and standards (TEMA, API,...)<br />
• TEMA nomenclature: rear end head types, shell types, font end types<br />
• TEMA standards: shell size, tube size, baffle, selection of materials, component<br />
design, nozzle loadings, supports, lifting features, high pressure, low temperature,<br />
specials designs<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
1.1 Programm outline 9<br />
2. DAY II HEAT TRANSFER FUNDAMENTALS AND THERMAL DE-<br />
SIGN<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> transfer mechanisms: conduction and convection as related to heat exchangers<br />
• Temperature difference in heat exchanger:<br />
– LMTD Method<br />
– ε-NTU Method<br />
– θ-Method<br />
• Overall heat transfer coefficient<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient and pressure drop for single phase and multiphase<br />
(evaporation and condensation)<br />
• Resistances to fouling<br />
• Illustration examples using the software CHEMCAD<br />
3. DAY III MECHANICAL DESIGN OF HE<br />
• Mechanical design: shells, channels and heads, tubesheets, bundles, tubestubesheet<br />
attachment<br />
• <strong>Design</strong> strategy, design algorithm<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger:<br />
– Selection procedure<br />
– Specification sheet<br />
– Bid evaluation<br />
• Worked example (USING CHEMCAD)<br />
4. DAY IV Storage, Installation, <strong>Operation</strong>, Maintenance<br />
• Storage<br />
• Installation procedure<br />
• <strong>Operation</strong><br />
• start up<br />
• shut down<br />
• Maintenance<br />
• Cleaning<br />
• Repair<br />
– Plug<br />
– Sleeving<br />
– Expansion<br />
• Replacement<br />
– Retubing<br />
– Rebundling<br />
– Replacement (new unit)<br />
5. DAY V Troubleshooting<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers’ problem<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
10 1 Introduction<br />
– Fouling: causes, mechanisms, design considerations and exchanger selection,<br />
remedies, cleaning<br />
– Leakage: Location (tube sheet, tube failure), causes (differential thermal<br />
expansion, flow-induced vibration),<br />
– Corrosion: Type, causes, material of construction, fabrication<br />
– Vibration: causes (velocity), design procedure to avoid vibration including<br />
baffle selection, rod baffles, impingement baffles<br />
• Past incidents failure.<br />
• Examples of common problems encountered in heat exchangers (low rate, uncontrolled<br />
outlet temperature, failure of tubes near the inlet nozzles)<br />
Achieve the learning outcomes to:<br />
Understand the principles of heat transfer and fluid flow, application of industry practices<br />
and a substantial amount of supporting data needed for design, performance and<br />
operation of modern heat exchangers.<br />
Gain insight not only into shell and tube heat exchangers but also heat transfer fundamentals<br />
as applied to heat exchangers, the types of heat exchangers and their application,<br />
and recent advance in heat exchanger technologies<br />
Become familiar with the practical aspects and receive tips on shell and tube heat<br />
exchanger thermal design and rating: mechanical design and rating using the applicable<br />
API, TEMA and ASME recommended practices, standards and codes, troubleshooting,<br />
and performance improvement and enhancement<br />
Avoid future problems by gaining insight into vibration forcing mechanisms<br />
Enhance your awareness of causes of failure and learn practical ways for determining<br />
and correcting them<br />
Daily Schedule: 8:00 Registration and Coffee (1st day only) 8:30 Session begins 4:30<br />
Adjournment<br />
There will be a forty-minute lunch break each day in addition to refreshment and networking<br />
break of 20 minutes during each morning and afternoon session.<br />
1.2 Instructor<br />
Faculty: Ali. Rabah, BSc. MSc., PhD., MSES., Assistant professor, Department<br />
of Chemical Engineering University of Khartoum<br />
Dr. Rabah holds a BSc. degree (Chemical Engineering) from the University of Khartoum,<br />
MSc. degree from university of Nairobi, Kenya, and PhD. degree from University of<br />
Hannover, Germany. He has a wide professional experience in teaching heat and mass<br />
transfer and engineering thermodynamics to BSc and MSc Chemical, Mechanical and<br />
Petroleum Engineering students.<br />
Dr. Rabah is a consultant engineer to a number of chemical industries and factories.<br />
He has developed and delivered numerous designs of heat exchangers, evaporators and<br />
boilers. He designed, for example, a 5 ton/hr (10 bar) fired tube boiler. His design is<br />
under fabrication.<br />
Dr. Rabah has designed and manufactured double pipe heat exchangers for education<br />
proposes to a number of chemical engineering departments country-wide e.g. University<br />
of Nileen.<br />
Dr. Rabah assumed engineering design positions with responsibilities covering design,<br />
construction and inspection of heat transfer equipments. The design projects are sponsored<br />
by the federal ministry of research and technology and the University of Khartoum<br />
consultancy cooperation.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
1.2 Instructor 11<br />
Dr. Rabah is a member of the Sudan Engineering Society (SES) and serving as a member<br />
of editorial board of SES Journal. He is a reviewer to a number of world wide software<br />
packages for chemical engineering simulations and the prediction of thermodynamic<br />
properties.<br />
Dr. Rabah has a number of publications in field of heat transfer and thermodynamics.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
12 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
The word exchanger really applies to all types of equipment in which heat is exchanged but<br />
is often used specially to denote equipment in which heat is exchanged between two process<br />
streams. <strong>Exchangers</strong> in which a process fluid is heated or cooled by a plant service stream<br />
are referred to as heatsers and coolers. If the process stream is vaporized the exchanger is<br />
called a vaporizer if the the stream is essentially completely vaporized: called a reboiled<br />
if associated with a distillation column: and evaporator if used to concentrate a solution.<br />
If the process fluid is condensed the exchanger is called a condenser. The term fired<br />
exchanger is used for exchangers heated by combustion gases, such as boiler. In heat<br />
exchanger the heat transfer between the fluid takes place through a separating wall. The<br />
wall may a solid wall or interface. <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers are used in<br />
• Oil and petrochemical Industry (upstream and down stream)<br />
• Sugar industry<br />
• Power generation industry<br />
• Air-cooling and refrigeration industry<br />
These heat exchanger may be classified according to:<br />
• Transfer process<br />
1. Direct contact<br />
2. indirect contact<br />
(a) Direct transfer type<br />
(b) Storage type<br />
(c) Fluidized bed<br />
• Surface compactness<br />
1. Compact (surface area density ≥ 700m 2 /m 3 )<br />
2. non-compact (surface area density < 700m 2 /m 3 )<br />
• Construction<br />
1. Tubular<br />
(a) Double pipe<br />
(b) Shell and tube<br />
(c) Spiral tube<br />
2. Plate<br />
(a) Gasketed<br />
(b) Spiral plate<br />
(c) Welded plate<br />
3. Extended surface<br />
(a) Plate fin<br />
(b) Tube fin<br />
4. Regenerative<br />
(a) Rotory<br />
i. Disc-type<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
ii. Drum-type<br />
(b) Fixed-matrix<br />
• Flow arrangement<br />
1. Single pass<br />
(a) Parallel flow<br />
(b) Counter flow<br />
(c) Cross flow<br />
2. Multipass<br />
(a) Extended surface H.E.<br />
i. Cross counter flow<br />
ii. Cross parallel flow<br />
(b) Shell and tube H.E.<br />
i. Parallel counter flow (Shell and fluid mixed, M shell pass, N Tube pass)<br />
ii. Split flow<br />
iii. Divided flow<br />
(c) Plate H.E. (N-parallel plate multipass)<br />
• Number of fluids<br />
1. Two-fluid<br />
2. Three fluid<br />
3. N-fluid (N > 3)<br />
• Transfer mechanisms<br />
1. Single phase convection on both sides<br />
2. Single phase convection on one side, two-phase convection on the other side<br />
3. Two-phase convection on both sides<br />
4. Combined convection and radiative heat transfer<br />
• Classification based on service: Basically, a service may be single phase (such as the<br />
cooling or heating of a liquid or gas) or two-phase (such as condensing or vaporizing).<br />
Since there are two sides to an STHE, this can lead to several combinations of services.<br />
Broadly, services can be classified as follows: single-phase (both shellside and<br />
tubeside); condensing (one side condensing and the other single-phase); vaporizing<br />
(one side vaporizing and the other side single-phase); and condensing/vaporizing<br />
(one side condensing and the other side vaporizing). The following nomenclature is<br />
usually used:<br />
– <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger: both sides singlephase and process streams (that is, not a<br />
utility).<br />
– Cooler: one stream a process fluid and the other cooling water or air. Dirty<br />
water can be used as the cooling medium. The top of the cooler is open to the<br />
atmosphere for access to tubes. These can be cleaned without shutting down<br />
the cooler by removing the distributors one at a time and scrubbing the tubes.<br />
– <strong>Heat</strong>er: one stream a process fluid and the other a hot utility, such as steam<br />
or hot oil.<br />
– Condenser: one stream a condensing vapor and the other cooling water or air.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
13
14 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
– Chiller: one stream a process fluid being condensed at sub-atmospheric temperatures<br />
and the other a boiling refrigerant or process stream. By cooling the<br />
falling film to its freezing point, these exchangers convert a variety of chemicals<br />
to the solid phase. The most common application is the production of sized ice<br />
and paradichlorobenzene. Selective freezing is used for isolating isomers. By<br />
melting the solid material and refreezing in several stages, a higher degree of<br />
purity of product can be obtained.<br />
– Reboiler: one stream a bottoms stream from a distillation column and the<br />
other a hot utility (steam or hot oil) or a process stream.<br />
– Evaporators:These are used extensively for the concentration of ammonium<br />
nitrate, urea, and other chemicals sensitive to heat when minimum contact<br />
time is desirable. Air is sometimes introduced in the tubes to lower the partial<br />
pressure of liquids whose boiling points are high. These evaporators are built<br />
for pressure or vacuum and with top or bottom vapor removal.<br />
– Absorbers: These have a two-phase flow system. The absorbing medium is<br />
put in film flow during its fall downward on the tubes as it is cooled by a cooling<br />
medium outside the tubes. The film absorbs the gas which is introduced into<br />
the tubes. This operation can be cocurrent or countercurrent.<br />
– Falling-Film <strong>Exchangers</strong>: Falling-film shell-and-tube heat exchangers have<br />
been developed for a wide variety of services and are described by Sack [Chem.<br />
Eng. Prog., 63, 55 (July 1967)]. The fluid enters at the top of the vertical<br />
tubes. Distributors or slotted tubes put the liquid in film flow in the inside<br />
surface of the tubes, and the film adheres to the tube surface while falling<br />
to the bottom of the tubes. The film can be cooled, heated, evaporated, or<br />
frozen by means of the proper heat-transfer medium outside the tubes. Tube<br />
distributors have been developed for a wide range of applications. Fixed tube<br />
sheets, with or without expansion joints, and outside-packed-head designs are<br />
used. Principal advantages are high rate of heat transfer, no internal pressure<br />
drop, short time of contact (very important for heat-sensitive materials), easy<br />
accessibility to tubes for cleaning, and, in some cases, prevention of leakage<br />
from one side to another. These falling-film exchangers are used in various<br />
services as described in the following paragraphs.<br />
Among these classifications the classification by construction is the most widely used one.<br />
2.1 Classification by construction<br />
The principal types of heat exchanger are listed again as<br />
1. Tubular exchanger<br />
2. Plate exchanger<br />
3. Extended surface<br />
4. Regenerative<br />
2.1.1 Tubular heat exchanger<br />
Tubular heat exchanger are generally built of circular tubes. Tubular heat exchanger is<br />
further classified into:<br />
• Double pipe heat exchanger<br />
• Spiral tube heat exchanger<br />
• Shell and tube heat exchanger<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
2.2 Double pipe heat exchanger 15<br />
2.2 Double pipe heat exchanger<br />
This is usually consists of concentric pipes. One fluid flow in the inner pipe and the other<br />
fluid flow in the annulus between pipes. The two fluid may flow concurrent (parallel) or<br />
in counter current flow configuration; hence the heat exchanger are classified as:<br />
• counter current double pipe heat exchanger (see Fig. 4.1and Fig. 2.2)and<br />
• cocurrent double pipe heat exchanger<br />
Figure 2.1. Double pipe heat exchanger. Courtesy of Perry, Chemical engineering hand book<br />
Elbew 3/4"<br />
Valve 3/4"<br />
Galv. pipe<br />
Threaded 3/4"<br />
Bypass<br />
pump<br />
Part A<br />
Double Pipe <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger<br />
Scale: None Sheet No.1 Date: 08.12.2003<br />
<strong>Design</strong>ed by: Dr.-Ing. Ali A. Rabah<br />
Tee 2"x1/2"<br />
Union 2"<br />
Tee 3/4"x1/2"<br />
Part B<br />
Flanged Gland 2"<br />
Galv. pipe 2"<br />
Cu pipe 3/4"<br />
Specification Sheet<br />
Item Qty Item Qty<br />
Tee 2"x3/4" 6 Tee 3/4"x1/2" 14<br />
Union 2" 6 Cu Bush 1/2" 8<br />
Valve 3/4" 4 Elbew 3/4" 10<br />
Galv. pipe 2"x3ft 3 Cu pipe 3/4"x4ft 3<br />
Galv. pipe 3/4"x1ft Selector<br />
(Threaded) 24 (20 Channel) 1<br />
Cu Flange 2" 8 Flow meter 3/4" 2<br />
Pump 0-40 l/min 2 Union 3/4" 30<br />
Amplifier 1 Microvoltmeter 1<br />
Thermocouples Elbew 1/2" 4<br />
(NiCr-Ni) 10 Union 1/2" 8<br />
Figure 2.2. Double pipe heat exchanger (Counter current)<br />
Double pipe heat exchanger is perhaps the simplest of all heat exchanger types. The<br />
advantages of this type are:<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
Flow meter<br />
Bypass
16 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
i Easily by disassembly, no cleaning problem<br />
ii Suitable for high pressure fluid, (the pressure containment in the small diameter pipe<br />
or tubing is a less costly method compared to a large diameter shell.)<br />
Limitation: The double pipe heat exchanger is generally used for the application where<br />
the total heat transfer surface area required is less than or equal to 20 m 2 (215 ft 2 ) because<br />
it is expensive on a cost per square meter (foot) basis.<br />
2.3 Spiral tube heat exchanger<br />
Spiral tube heat exchanger consists of one or more spirally wound coils fitted in a shell<br />
(Fig. 2.3). <strong>Heat</strong> transfer associated with spiral tube is higher than than that for a straight<br />
tube . In addition, considerable amount of surface area can be accommodated in a given<br />
space by spiralling. Thermal expansion is no problem but cleaning is almost impossible.<br />
Figure 2.3. Spiral tube heat exchanger. Courtesy of The German Atlas<br />
2.4 Shell and tube heat exchanger<br />
Shell and tube heat exchanger is built of round tubes mounted in a cylindrical shell with<br />
the tube axis parallel to that of the shell. One fluid flow inside the tube, the other flow<br />
across and along the tubes. The major components of the shell and tube heat exchanger<br />
are tube bundle, shell, front end head, rear end head, baffles and tube sheets (Fig.2.4).<br />
Figure 2.4. Shell and tube heat exchanger<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
2.4 Shell and tube heat exchanger 17<br />
The shell and tube heat exchanger is further divided into three catogaries as<br />
1. Fixed tube sheet<br />
2. U tube<br />
3. Floating head<br />
2.4.1 Fixed tubesheet<br />
A fixed-tubesheet heat exchanger (Figure 2.5) has straight tubes that are secured at both<br />
ends to tubesheets welded to the shell. The construction may have removable channel<br />
covers , bonnet-type channel covers , or integral tubesheets. The principal advantage of<br />
the fixedtubesheet construction is its low cost because of its simple construction. In fact,<br />
the fixed tubesheet is the least expensive construction type, as long as no expansion joint<br />
is required.<br />
Figure 2.5. Fixed-tubesheet heat exchanger.<br />
Other advantages are that the tubes can be cleaned mechanically after removal of the<br />
channel cover or bonnet, and that leakage of the shellside fluid is minimized since there<br />
are no flanged joints.<br />
A disadvantage of this design is that since the bundle is fixed to the shell and cannot be<br />
removed, the outsides of the tubes cannot be cleaned mechanically. Thus, its application<br />
is limited to clean services on the shellside. However, if a satisfactory chemical cleaning<br />
program can be employed, fixed-tubesheet construction may be selected for fouling<br />
services on the shellside.<br />
In the event of a large differential temperature between the tubes and the shell, the<br />
tubesheets will be unable to absorb the differential stress, thereby making it necessary to<br />
incorporate an expansion joint. This takes away the advantage of low cost to a significant<br />
extent.<br />
2.4.2 U-tube<br />
As the name implies, the tubes of a U-tube heat exchanger (Figure 2.6) are bent in<br />
the shape of a U. There is only one tubesheet in a Utube heat exchanger. However,<br />
the lower cost for the single tubesheet is offset by the additional costs incurred for the<br />
bending of the tubes and the somewhat larger shell diameter (due to the minimum U-bend<br />
radius), making the cost of a U-tube heat exchanger comparable to that of a fixedtubesheet<br />
exchanger.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
18 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
The advantage of a U-tube heat exchanger is that because one end is free, the bundle<br />
can expand or contract in response to stress differentials. In addition, the outsides of the<br />
tubes can be cleaned, as the tube bundle can be removed.<br />
The disadvantage of the U-tube construction is that the insides of the tubes cannot be<br />
cleaned effectively, since the U-bends would require flexible- end drill shafts for cleaning.<br />
Thus, U-tube heat exchangers should not be used for services with a dirty fluid inside<br />
tubes.<br />
2.4.3 Floating head<br />
Figure 2.6. U-tube heat exchanger.<br />
The floating-head heat exchanger is the most versatile type of STHE, and also the costliest.<br />
In this design, one tubesheet is fixed relative to the shell, and the other is free to ”float”<br />
within the shell. This permits free expansion of the tube bundle, as well as cleaning<br />
of both the insides and outsides of the tubes. Thus, floating-head SHTEs can be used<br />
for services where both the shellside and the tubeside fluids are dirty-making this the<br />
standard construction type used in dirty services, such as in petroleum refineries.<br />
There are various types of floating- head construction. The two most common are the<br />
pull-through with backing device and pullthrough without backing service designs. The<br />
design (Figure 2.7) with backing service is the most common configuration in the chemical<br />
process industries (CPI). The floating-head cover is secured against the floating tubesheet<br />
by bolting it to an ingenious split backing ring. This floating-head closure is located<br />
beyond the end of the shell and contained by a shell cover of a larger diameter. To<br />
dismantle the heat exchanger, the shell cover is removed first, then the split backing ring,<br />
and then the floating-head cover, after which the tube bundle can be removed from the<br />
stationary end.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
2.5 Plate heat exchangers 19<br />
Figure 2.7. Floating head with packing service.<br />
In the design without packing service construction (Figure 2.8), the entire tube bundle,<br />
including the floating-head assembly, can be removed from the stationary end, since the<br />
shell diameter is larger than the floating-head flange. The floatinghead cover is bolted<br />
directly to the floating tubesheet so that a split backing ring is not required. The advantage<br />
of this construction is that the tube bundle may be removed from the shell without<br />
removing either the shell or the floatinghead cover, thus reducing maintenance time. This<br />
design is particularly suited to kettle reboilers having a dirty heating medium where Utubes<br />
cannot be employed. Due to the enlarged shell, this construction has the highest<br />
cost of all exchanger types.<br />
Figure 2.8. Floating head without packing service.<br />
2.5 Plate heat exchangers<br />
These exchangers are generally built of thin plates. The plate are either smooth or have<br />
some form of corrugations and they are either flat or wound in exchanger. Generally<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
20 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
theses exchanger cannot accomodate high pressure/temperature differential relative the<br />
tubular exchanger. This type of exchanger is further classified as:<br />
• Gasketed plate<br />
• Fixed plate<br />
• Spiral plate<br />
2.5.1 Gasketed plate heat exchanger<br />
Gasketed plate heat exchanger (see Fig. 2.9) consists of a series of corrugated alloy<br />
material channel plates, bounded by elastomeric gaskets are hung off and guided by longitudinal<br />
carrying bars, then compressed by large-diameter tightening bolts between two<br />
pressure retaining frame plates (cover plates).<br />
Figure 2.9. Plate heat exchanger<br />
The frame and channel plates have portholes which allow the process fluids to enter alternating<br />
flow passages (the space between two adjacent-channel plates) Fig.2.10. Gaskets<br />
around the periphery of the channel plate prevent leakage to the atmosphere and also prevent<br />
process fluids from coming in contact with the frame plates. No inter fluid leakage<br />
is possible in the port area due to a dual-gasket seal. Fig.2.11 shows the plate profiles.<br />
Expansion of the initial unit is easily performed in the field without special considerations.<br />
The original frame length typically has an additional capacity of 15-20 percent more<br />
channel plates (i.e. surface area). In fact, if a known future capacity is available during<br />
fabrication stages, a longer carrying bar could be installed, and later, increasing the<br />
surface area would be easily handled. When the expansion is needed, simply untighten<br />
the carrying bolts, pull back the frame plate, add the additional channel plates, and<br />
tighten the frame plate.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
2.5 Plate heat exchangers 21<br />
Figure 2.10. Plate heat exchanger flow configuration<br />
Applications: Most PHE applications are liquid-liquid services but there are numerous<br />
steam heater and evaporator uses from their heritage in the food industry. Industrial users<br />
typically have chevron style channel plates while some food applications are washboard<br />
style.<br />
Fine particulate slurries in concentrations up to 70 percent by weight are possible with<br />
standard channel spacings. Wide-gap units are used with larger particle sizes. Typical<br />
particle size should not exceed 75 percent of the single plate (not total channel) gap.<br />
Close temperature approaches and tight temperature control possible with PHE’s and the<br />
ability to sanitize the entire heat transfer surface easily were a major benefit in the food<br />
and pharmaceutical industry.<br />
Advantages: -<br />
• Easily assembled and dismantled<br />
• Easily cleaned both chemically and mechanically<br />
• Flexible (the heat transfer can be changed as required)<br />
• Can be used for multiple service as required<br />
• Leak is immediately deteced since all plates are vented to the atmosphere, and the<br />
fluid split on the floor rather than mixing with other fluid<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient is larger and hence small heat transfer area is required than<br />
STHE<br />
• The space required is less than that for STHE for the same duty<br />
• Less fouling due to high turbulent flow<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
22 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
Figure 2.11. Plate and frame of a plate heat exchanger<br />
• Very close temperature approach can be obtained<br />
• low hold up volume<br />
• LMTD is fully utilized<br />
• More economical when material cost are high<br />
Disadvantages: -<br />
• Low pressure
2.5 Plate heat exchangers 23<br />
stacking of plates method of assembly, entirely braze the plates together with copper or<br />
nickel brazing, diffusion bond then pressure form plates and bond etched, passage plates<br />
Fig. 2.12 and Fig. 2.13.<br />
Typical applications include district heating where the low cost and minimal maintenance<br />
have made this type of heat exchanger especially attractive.<br />
Figure 2.12. Welded or blazed plate heat exchanger<br />
Figure 2.13. Fin-Plate heat exchanger<br />
Most methods of welded-plate manufacturing do not allow for inspection of the heattransfer<br />
surface, mechanical cleaning of that surface, and have limited ability to repair<br />
or plug off damage channels. Consider these limitations when the fluid is heavily fouling,<br />
has solids, or in general the repair or plugging ability for severe services.<br />
2.5.3 Spiral Plate Exchanger (SPHE)<br />
The spiral-plate heat exchanger (SHE) may be one exchanger selected primarily on its<br />
virtues and not on its initial cost. SPHEs offer high reliability and on-line performance in<br />
many severely fouling services such as slurries. The SHE is formed by rolling two strips<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
24 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
of plate, with welded-on spacer studs, upon each other into clock-spring shape Fig.2.14<br />
and Fig.2.15. This forms two passages. Passages are sealed off on one end of the SHE by<br />
welding a bar to the plates; hot and cold fluid passages are sealed off on opposite ends of<br />
the SHE. A single rectangular flow passage is now formed for each fluid, producing very<br />
high shear rates compared to tubular designs. Removable covers are provided on each<br />
end to access and clean the entire heat transfer surface.<br />
Figure 2.14. Spiral Plate heat exchanger<br />
Pure countercurrent flow is achieved and LMTD correction factor is essentially = 1.0.<br />
Since there are no dead spaces in a SHE, the helical flow pattern combines to entrain<br />
any solids and create high turbulence creating a self-cleaning flow passage. There are<br />
no thermal-expansion problems in spirals. Since the center of the unit is not fixed, it<br />
can torque to relieve stress. The SHE can be expensive when only one fluid requires a<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
2.5 Plate heat exchangers 25<br />
high alloy material. Since the heat-transfer plate contacts both fluids, it is required to be<br />
fabricated out of the higher alloy. SHEs can be fabricated out of any material that can be<br />
cold-worked and welded. The channel spacings can be different on each side to match the<br />
flow rates and pressure drops of the process design. The spacer studs are also adjusted in<br />
their pitch to match the fluid characteristics. As the coiled plate spirals outward, the plate<br />
thickness increases from a minimum of 2 mm to a maximum (as required by pressure)<br />
up to 10 mm. This means relatively thick material separates the two fluids compared to<br />
tubing of conventional exchangers.<br />
a) Spiral flow in both channels b) Flow are both spiral and axial<br />
Figure 2.15. Spiral Plate heat exchanger<br />
Applications: The most common applications that fit SHE are slurries. The rectangular<br />
channel provides high shear and turbulence to sweep the surface clear of blockage<br />
and causes no distribution problems associated with other exchanger types. A localized<br />
restriction causes an increase in local velocity which aids in keeping the unit free flowing.<br />
Only fibers that are long and stringy cause SHE to have a blockage it cannot clear itself.<br />
As an additional antifoulant measure, SHEs have been coated with a phenolic lining. This<br />
provides some degree of corrosion protection as well, but this is not guaranteed due to<br />
pinholes in the lining process.<br />
There are three types of SHE to fit different applications:<br />
• Type I is the spiral-spiral flow pattern (Fig. 2.15a). It is used for all heating and<br />
cooling services and can accommodate temperature crosses such as lean/rich services<br />
in one unit. The removable covers on each end allow access to one side at a time to<br />
perform maintenance on that fluid side. Never remove a cover with one side under<br />
pressure as the unit will telescope out like a collapsible cup.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
26 2 Classification of heat exchangers<br />
• Type II units are the condenser and reboiler designs (Fig. 2.15b). One side is spiral<br />
flow and the other side is in cross flow. These SHEs provide very stable designs<br />
for vacuum condensing and reboiling services. A SHE can be fitted with special<br />
mounting connections for reflux-type ventcondenser applications. The vertically<br />
mounted SHE directly attaches on the column or tank.<br />
• Type III units are a combination of the Type I and Type II where part is in spiral<br />
flow and part is in cross flow. This SHE can condense and subcool in a single<br />
unit. The unique channel arrangement has been used to provide on-line cleaning,<br />
by switching fluid sides to clean the fouling (caused by the fluid that previously<br />
flowed there) off the surface. Phosphoric acid coolers use pond water for cooling<br />
and both sides foul; water, as you expect, and phosphoric acid deposit crystals. By<br />
reversing the flow sides, the water dissolves the acid crystals and the acid clears up<br />
the organic fouling. SHEs are also used as oleum coolers, sludge coolers/ heaters,<br />
slop oil heaters, and in other services where multiple flow- passage designs have not<br />
performed well.<br />
2.6 Extended surface<br />
The tubular and plate exchangers described previously are all prime surface heat exchangers.<br />
The design thermal effectiveness is usually 60 % and below and the heat transfer area<br />
density is usually less than 300 m 2 m 3 . In many application an effectiveness of up to 90<br />
% is essential and the box volume and mass are limited so that a much more compact<br />
surface is mandated. Usually either a gas or a liquid having a low heat transfer coefficient<br />
is the fluid on one or both sides. This results in a large heat transfer area requirements.<br />
for low density fluid (gases), pressure drop constraints tend to require a large flow area.<br />
so a question arises how can we increase both the surface area and flow area together in<br />
a reasonably shaped configuration.<br />
The surface area may be increased by the fins. The flow area is increased by the use of<br />
thin gauge material and sizing the core property. There are two most common types of<br />
extended surface heat exchangers. These are<br />
• Plate-fin<br />
• Tube-fin<br />
2.6.1 Plate fin<br />
Plate -fin heat exchanger has fins or spacers sandwiched between parallel plates (refereed<br />
to as parting plates or parting sheets) or formed tubes as shown in fig. 2.16(left). While<br />
the plates separate the two fluid streams, the fins form the individual flow passages. Fins<br />
are used on both sides in a gas-gas heat exchanger. In gas-liquid applications fins are<br />
used in the gas side.<br />
Figure 2.17. Finned tube heat exchanger<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
2.6 Extended surface 27<br />
Figure 2.16. Examples of extended surfaces on one or both sides. Plate fins on both sides<br />
(left) and Tubes and plate fins (right).<br />
2.6.2 Tube fin<br />
In tube fin heat exchanger, tubes of round, rectangular, or elliptical shape are generally<br />
used. Fins are generally used on the outside and also used inside the tubes in some<br />
applications. they are attached to the tube by tight mechanical fit, tension wound, gluing,<br />
soldering, brazing, welding or extrusion. Tube fin exchanger is shown in Fig. 2.16(right)<br />
and Fig.2.17<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
28 3 Code and standards<br />
3 Code and standards<br />
The objective of codes and standards are best described by ASME: The objectives of<br />
code rules and standards (apart from fixing dimensional values) is to achieve minimum<br />
requirements for safe construction, in other words, to provide public protection by defining<br />
those materials, design, fabrication and inspection requirements; whose omission may<br />
radically increase operating hazards.... Experience with code rules has demonstrated that<br />
the probability of disastrous failure can be reduced to the extremely low level necessary to<br />
protect life and property by suitable minimum requirements and safety factors. Obviously,<br />
it is impossible for general rules to anticipate other than conventional service,.... Suitable<br />
precautions are therefore entirely the responsibility of the design engineer guided by the<br />
needs and specifications of the user.<br />
Over years a number of standardization bodies have been developed by individual country,<br />
manufacturers and designers to lay down nomenclatures for the size and type of shell and<br />
tube heat exchangers. These include among other<br />
• TEMA standards (Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer Association., 1998)[147]<br />
• HEI standards (<strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger Institute, 1980),<br />
• API (American Petroleum Institute).<br />
• Other national standards include the German (DIN), Japan, India, to mention a<br />
few.<br />
In this work, being most widely used one, the TEMA standard is presented.<br />
3.1 TEMA <strong>Design</strong>ations<br />
In order to understand the design and operation of the shell and tube heat exchanger, it<br />
is important to know the nomenclature and terminology used to describe them and the<br />
various parts that go to their construction. Only then we can understand the design and<br />
reports given by the researchers, designers, manufacturer and users.<br />
It is essential for the designer to have a good working knowledge of the mechanical features<br />
of STHEs and how they influence thermal design. The principal components of an STHE<br />
are:<br />
• shell;<br />
• shell cover;<br />
• tubes;<br />
• channel;<br />
• channel cover;<br />
• tubesheet;<br />
• baffles; and<br />
• nozzles.<br />
Other components include tie-rods and spacers, pass partition plates, impingement plate,<br />
longitudinal baffle, sealing strips, supports, and foundation. Table 3.1 shows the nomenclature<br />
used for different parts of shell and tube exchanger in accordance with TEMA<br />
standards; the numbers refer to the feature shown in Fig. 3.2 to Fig. 3.8.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.1 TEMA <strong>Design</strong>ations 29<br />
Table 3.1. TEAM notations<br />
Index Notation Index Notation<br />
1 stationary head- channel 20 slip on backing flange<br />
2 stationary head- bonnet 21 floating head cover-external<br />
3 stationary head flange-chennel or bonnet 22 floating tube sheet skirt<br />
4 channel cover 23 packing box<br />
5 stationary head - nozzle 24 packing<br />
6 stationary tube sheet 25 packing gland<br />
7 tubes 26 latern ring<br />
8 shell 27 tie rods and spacers<br />
9 shell cover 28 traverse baffle or support plate<br />
10 shell flange-stationary head end 29 impingement plate<br />
11 shell flange-rear head end 30 longitudinal baffle<br />
12 shell nozzle 31 pass partition<br />
13 shell cover flange 32 vent connection<br />
14 expansion joint 33 drain connection<br />
15 floating tube sheet 34 instrument connection<br />
16 floating head cover 35 support saddle<br />
17 floating head flange 36 lifting lug<br />
18 floating head backing device 37 support bracket<br />
19 split shear ring 38 weir<br />
39 liquid level connection<br />
Because of the number of variations in mechanical designs for front and rear heads and<br />
shells, and for commercial reasons, TEMA has divided STHE into main three components:<br />
front head, shell and rear head. Fig. 3.1 illustrates TEMA nomenclature for the various<br />
construction possibilities. TEMA has classified the front head channel and bonnet types as<br />
given the letters (A,B,C,N,D) and the shell is classified according to the nozzles locations<br />
for the inlet and outlet. There are type of shell configuration ( E,F,G,H,J,K,X). Similarly<br />
the rear head is classified ( M,N,P,S,T,U,W).<br />
<strong>Exchangers</strong> are described by the letter codes of the three sections. The first letter stands<br />
for the front head, the second letter for the shell type and the third letter for the rear head<br />
type. For example a BFL exchanger has a bonnet cover, two-shell pass with longitudinal<br />
baffles and a fixed tube sheet rear head.<br />
In addition to these the size of the exchanger is required to be identified with the notation.<br />
The size is identified by the shell inside diameter (nominal) and tube length (both are<br />
rounded to the nearest integer in inch or mm). Demonstration examples are shown below:<br />
• Type AES size 23-192 in (590-4880): This exchanger has a removable channel<br />
cover (A), single pass shell (E) and Split ring floating front head (S) it has , 23 in<br />
(590 mm) inside diameter with tubes of 16 ft (4880 mm) long.<br />
• Type BGU Size 19-84 (480-2130)This exchanger has a bonnet-type stationary<br />
front head (B), split flow shell (G) and U-tube bundle rear head(U) with 19 in (480)<br />
inside diameter and 7 ft (2130 mm) tube length.<br />
• Type AFM size 33-96 (840-2440): This exchanger has a removable channel and cover<br />
front head (A), two-pass shell (F) and fixed tube sheet bonnet-type rear head (M)<br />
with 33 1/8 in (840 mm) inside diameter and 8ft (2440 mm) tube length.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
30 3 Code and standards<br />
Figure 3.1. TEMA-type designations for shell-and-tube heat exchangers. (Standards of Tubular<br />
Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
In the above illustration the term single pass and two pass shell have been used. This<br />
mean that the shell side fluid travels only one through the shell (single pass) or twice (two<br />
pass shell). Two pass shell mean that the fluid enters at one end, travel to other end and<br />
back to the end where it entered (making U-turn). Similarly there are multiple pases. To<br />
be remembered is that the number of tube passes is equal to or greater than the number<br />
of shell passes. Generally the multi shell and tube passes are usually designated by two<br />
numerals separated by a hyphen, with the first numeral indication the number of shell<br />
pass and the other stands for the tube passes. For example a one-shell pass and two tube<br />
pass AEL exchanger will be written as 1-2 AEL. To be remembered is that this not an<br />
TEMA standards. TEMA requires the number of shell and tube passes to be spelled out<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.1 TEMA <strong>Design</strong>ations 31<br />
as in the pervious examples. In a heat exchanger specification sheet there is a space for<br />
indicating the number of shell and tube passes. Another identification of the shell and<br />
tube heat exchanger is the number of shell passes. 1 shell pass, 2 shell pass, etc. This is<br />
not a TEMA standardization. The tube passes can be equal to or greater than the shell<br />
pass.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
32 3 Code and standards<br />
Packed Internal Outside<br />
Type Fixed lantern-ring floating head packed Pull-through<br />
of design tube sheet U-tube floating head (split backing ring) floating head floating head<br />
T.E.M.A. rear<br />
-head type L or M or N U W S P T<br />
Relative cost increases<br />
from A (least<br />
expensive) through<br />
E (most expensive) B A C E D E<br />
Provision for<br />
differential expansion Expansion Individual tubes Floating head Floating head Floating head Floating head<br />
joint in free to expand<br />
shell<br />
Removable bundle No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
Replacement bundle<br />
possible No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
Individual tubes<br />
replaceable Yes Only those in Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
outside row<br />
Tube cleaning by<br />
chemicals inside<br />
and outside Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
Interior tube<br />
cleaning mechanically Yes Special tools required Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
Exterior tube<br />
cleaning mechanically:<br />
Triangular pitch No No No No No No<br />
Square pitch No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
Hydraulic-jet<br />
cleaning:<br />
Tube interior Yes Special tools required Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
Tube exterior No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes<br />
Double tube<br />
sheet feasible Yes Yes No No Yes No<br />
Number of tube passes No practical Any even Limited to one No practical No practical No practical<br />
limitations number possible or two passes limitations limitations limitations<br />
Internal gaskets<br />
eliminated Yes Yes Yes No Yes No<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
Table 3.2. Features of TEMA Shell-and-Tube-Type <strong>Exchangers</strong>.
3.2 Classification by construction STHE 33<br />
3.2 Classification by construction STHE<br />
Fig. 3.2 to Fig. 3.8 show details of the construction of the TEMA types of shell-and-tube<br />
heat exchangers. These types are:<br />
• Fixed tube sheet<br />
• U-tube<br />
• Floating head<br />
3.2.1 Fixed tube sheet<br />
Fixed-tube-sheet exchangers (Fig. 3.2) are used more often than any other type, and<br />
the frequency of use has been increasing in recent years. The tube sheets are welded<br />
to the shell. Usually these extend beyond the shell and serve as flanges to which the<br />
tube-side headers are bolted. This construction requires that the shell and tube-sheet<br />
materials be weldable to each other. When such welding is not possible, a blind-gasket<br />
type of construction is utilized. The blind gasket is not accessible for maintenance or<br />
replacement once the unit has been constructed. This construction is used for steam<br />
surface condensers, which operate under vacuum.<br />
Figure 3.2. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. Fixed tube heat sheet shell and tube<br />
heat exchanger. (Standard of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
The tube-side header (or channel) may be welded to the tube sheet, as shown in Fig. 3.1<br />
for type C and N heads. This type of construction is less costly than types B and M or<br />
A and L and still offers the advantage that tubes may be examined and replaced without<br />
disturbing the tube-side piping connections. There is no limitation on the number of<br />
tube-side passes. Shell-side passes can be one or more, although shells with more than<br />
two shell side passes are rarely used. Tubes can completely fill the heat-exchanger shell.<br />
Clearance between the outermost tubes and the shell is only the minimum necessary<br />
for fabrication. Between the inside of the shell and the baffles some clearance must be<br />
provided so that baffles can slide into the shell. Fabrication tolerances then require some<br />
additional clearance between the outside of the baffles and the outermost tubes. The edge<br />
distance between the outer tube limit (OTL) and the baffle diameter must be sufficient<br />
to prevent vibration of the tubes from breaking through the baffle holes. The outermost<br />
tube must be contained within the OTL.<br />
Clearances between the inside shell diameter and OTL are 13 mm (1/2 in) for 635-mm-<br />
(25-in-) inside-diameter shells and up, 11 mm for 254- through 610-mm (10- through<br />
24-in) pipe shells, and slightly less for smaller-diameter pipe shells.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
34 3 Code and standards<br />
Tubes can be replaced. Tube-side headers, channel covers, gaskets, etc., are accessible for<br />
maintenance and replacement. Neither the shell-side baffle structure nor the blind gasket<br />
is accessible. During tube removal, a tube may break within the shell. When this occurs,<br />
it is most difficult to remove or to replace the tube. The usual procedure is to plug the<br />
appropriate holes in the tube sheets.<br />
Differential expansion between the shell and the tubes can develop because of differences<br />
in length caused by thermal expansion. Various types of expansion joints are used to<br />
eliminate excessive stresses caused by expansion. The need for an expansion joint is a<br />
function of both the amount of differential expansion and the cycling conditions to be<br />
expected during operation. A number of types of expansion joints are available (Fig. 3.3)<br />
.<br />
Figure 3.3. Expansion joints.<br />
a Flat plates. Two concentric flat plates with a bar at the outer edges. The flat plates<br />
can flex to make some allowance for differential expansion. This design is generally<br />
used for vacuum service and gauge pressures below 103 kPa (15 lbf/in2). All welds<br />
are subject to severe stress during differential expansion.<br />
b Flanged-only heads. The flat plates are flanged (or curved). The diameter of these<br />
heads is generally 203 mm (8 in) or more greater than the shell diameter. The<br />
welded joint at the shell is subject to the stress referred to before, but the joint<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.2 Classification by construction STHE 35<br />
connecting the heads is subjected to less stress during expansion because of the<br />
curved shape.<br />
c Flared shell or pipe segments. The shell may be flared to connect with a pipe<br />
section, or a pipe may be halved and quartered to produce a ring.<br />
d Formed heads. A pair of dished-only or elliptical or flanged and dished heads can<br />
be used. These are welded together or connected by a ring. This type of joint is<br />
similar to the flanged-only-head type but apparently is subject to less stress.<br />
e Flanged and flued heads. A pair of flanged-only heads is provided with concentric<br />
reverse flue holes. These heads are relatively expensive because of the cost of the<br />
fluing operation. The curved shape of the heads reduces the amount of stress at the<br />
welds to the shell and also connecting the heads.<br />
f Toroidal. The toroidal joint has a mathematically predictable smooth stress pattern<br />
of low magnitude, with maximum stresses at sidewalls of the corrugation and<br />
minimum stresses at top and bottom. The foregoing designs were discussed as ring<br />
expansion joints by Kopp and Sayre, Expansion Joints for <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong> (ASME<br />
Misc. Pap., vol. 6, no. 211). All are statically indeterminate but are subjected<br />
to analysis by introducing various simplifying assumptions. Some joints in current<br />
industrial use are of lighter wall construction than is indicated by the method of<br />
this paper.<br />
g Bellows. Thin-wall bellows joints are produced by various manufacturers. These are<br />
designed for differential expansion and are tested for axial and transverse movement<br />
as well as for cyclical life. Bellows may be of stainless steel, nickel alloys, or copper.<br />
(Aluminum, Monel, phosphor bronze, and titanium bellows have been manufactured.)<br />
Welding nipples of the same composition as the heat-exchanger shell are<br />
generally furnished. The bellows may be hydraulically formed from a single piece<br />
of metal or may consist of welded pieces. External insulation covers of carbon steel<br />
are often provided to protect the light-gauge bellows from damage. The cover also<br />
prevents insulation from interfering with movement of the bellows (see h).<br />
h Toroidal bellows. For high-pressure service the bellows type of joint has been modified<br />
so that movement is taken up by thin-wall small-diameter bellows of a toroidal<br />
shape. Thickness of parts under high pressure is reduced considerably (see f ).<br />
Improper handling during manufacture, transit, installation, or maintenance of the heat<br />
exchanger equipped with the thin-wallbellows type or toroidal type of expansion joint can<br />
damage the joint. In larger units these light-wall joints are particularly susceptible to<br />
damage, and some designers prefer the use of the heavier walls of formed heads.<br />
Chemical-plant exchangers requiring expansion joints most commonly have used the<br />
flanged-and-flued-head type. There is a trend toward more common use of the lightwall-bellows<br />
type.<br />
3.2.2 U-Tube <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger<br />
Fig. 3.4 shows U-tube heat exchanger Type CFU. The tube bundle consists of a stationary<br />
tube sheet, U tubes (or hairpin tubes), baffles or support plates, and appropriate tie rods<br />
and spacers. The tube bundle can be removed from the heat-exchanger shell. A tube-side<br />
header (stationary head) and a shell with integral shell cover, which is welded to the<br />
shell, are provided. Each tube is free to expand or contract without any limitation being<br />
placed upon it by the other tubes. The U-tube bundle has the advantage of providing<br />
minimum clearance between the outer tube limit and the inside of the shell for any of<br />
the removable-tube-bundle constructions. Clearances are of the same magnitude as for<br />
fixed-tube-sheet heat exchangers. The number of tube holes in a given shell is less than<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
36 3 Code and standards<br />
that for a fixed-tube-sheet exchanger because of limitations on bending tubes of a very<br />
short radius.<br />
Figure 3.4. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. U-tube heat exchanger. Type CFU.<br />
(Standard of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
The U-tube design offers the advantage of reducing the number of joints. In high-pressure<br />
construction this feature becomes of considerable importance in reducing both initial and<br />
maintenance costs. The use of U-tube construction has increased significantly with the<br />
development of hydraulic tube cleaners, which can remove fouling residues from both the<br />
straight and the U-bend portions of the tubes. Rods and conventional mechanical tube<br />
cleaners cannot pass from one end of the U tube to the other. Power-driven tube cleaners,<br />
which can clean both the straight legs of the tubes and the bends, are available. Hydraulic<br />
jetting with water forced through spray nozzles at high pressure for cleaning tube interiors<br />
and exteriors of removal bundles is reported in the recent ASME publications.<br />
U-tube can be used for high pressure and high temperature application like kettle reboiler,<br />
evaporator, tank section heaters ,etc.<br />
The tank suction heater, as illustrated in Fig. 3.5, contains a U-tube bundle. This design<br />
is often used with outdoor storage tanks for heavy fuel oils, tar, molasses, and similar<br />
fluids whose viscosity must be lowered to permit easy pumping. Uusally the tube-side<br />
heating medium is steam. One end of the heater shell is open, and the liquid being heated<br />
passes across the outside of the tubes. Pumping costs can be reduced without heating the<br />
entire contents of the tank. Bare tube and integral low-fin tubes are provided with baffles.<br />
Longitudinal fin-tube heaters are not baffled. Fins are most often used to minimize the<br />
fouling potential in these fluids.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.2 Classification by construction STHE 37<br />
Figure 3.5. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. U-tube heat exchanger. Type CFU.<br />
(Standard of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
Kettle-type reboilers, evaporators, etc. , are often U-tube exchangers with enlarged shell<br />
sections for vapor-liquid separation (Fig.3.6). The U-tube bundle replaces the floatingheat<br />
bundle of Fig. 3.4.<br />
Figure 3.6. Kettle reboiler<br />
The U-tube exchanger with copper tubes, cast-iron header, and other parts of carbon<br />
steel is used for water and steam services in office buildings, schools, hospitals, hotels, etc.<br />
Nonferrous tube sheets and admiralty or 90-10 copper-nickel tubes are the most frequently<br />
used substitute materials. These standard exchangers are available from a number of<br />
manufacturers at costs far below those of custombuilt process-industry equipment.<br />
3.2.3 Floating Head <strong>Design</strong>s<br />
In an effort to reduce thermal stresses and provide a means to remove the tube bundle<br />
for cleaning, several floating rear head designs have been established. The simplest is a<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
38 3 Code and standards<br />
Internal floating head (pull- through design) Fig3.9 design which allows the tube bundle to<br />
be pulled entirely through the shell for service or replacement. In order to accommodate<br />
the rear head bolt circle, tubes must be removed resulting in a less efficient use of shell<br />
size. In addition, the missing tubes result in larger annular spaces and can contribute to<br />
reduced flow across the effective tube surface, resulting in reduced thermal performance.<br />
Some designs include sealing strips installed in the shell to help block the bypass steam.<br />
Another floating head design that partially addresses the above disadvantages is a splitring<br />
floating head. Here the floating head bonnet is bolted to a split backing ring instead<br />
of the tube sheet. This eliminates the bolt circle diameter and allows a full complement<br />
of tubes to fill the shell. This construction is more expensive than a common pull through<br />
design, but is in wide use in petrochemical applications. For applications with high<br />
pressures or temperatures, or where more positive sealing between the fluids is desired,<br />
the pull-through design should be specified.<br />
Two other types, the outside packed lantern ring and the outside packed stuffing box<br />
designs offer less positive sealing against leakage to the atmosphere than the pull though<br />
or split ring designs, but can be configured for single tube pass duty. More details about<br />
the various types of floating head shell and tube heat exchanger is given the following<br />
sections<br />
Packed-Lantern-Ring Exchanger: (Fig. 3.7 ) This construction is the least costly<br />
of the straight-tube removable bundle types. The shell- and tube-side fluids are each<br />
contained by separate rings of packing separated by a lantern ring and are installed at the<br />
floating tube sheet. The lantern ring is provided with weep holes. Any leakage passing<br />
the packing goes through the weep holes and then drops to the ground. Leakage at the<br />
packing will not result in mixing within the exchanger of the two fluids. The width of the<br />
floating tube sheet must be great enough to allow for the packings, the lantern ring, and<br />
differential expansion. Sometimes a small skirt is attached to a thin tube sheet to provide<br />
the required bearing surface for packings and lantern ring. The clearance between the<br />
outer tube limit and the inside of the shell is slightly larger than that for fixed-tube-sheet<br />
and U-tube exchangers.<br />
The use of a floating-tube-sheet skirt increases this clearance. Without the skirt the<br />
clearance must make allowance for tubehole distortion during tube rolling near the outside<br />
edge of the tube sheet or for tube-end welding at the floating tube sheet.<br />
The packed-lantern-ring construction is generally limited to design temperatures below<br />
191 ◦ C (375 ◦ F) and to the mild services of water, steam, air, lubricating oil, etc. <strong>Design</strong><br />
gauge pressure does not exceed 2068 kPa (300 lbf/in 2 ) for pipe shell exchangers and is<br />
limited to 1034 kPa (150 lbf/in 2 ) for 610- to 1067-mm- (24- to 42-in-) diameter shells.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.2 Classification by construction STHE 39<br />
Figure 3.7. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. Exchanger with packed floating tube<br />
sheet and lantern ring. Type AJW. External floating head design. (Standard of Tubular Exchanger<br />
Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
Outside-Packed Floating-Head Exchanger: (Fig. 3.8) The shell-side fluid is contained<br />
by rings of packing, which are compressed within a stuffing box by a packing<br />
follower ring. This construction was frequently used in the chemical industry, but in<br />
recent years usage has decreased. The removable-bundle construction accommodates differential<br />
expansion between shell and tubes and is used for shell-side service up to 4137<br />
kPa gauge pressure (600 lbf/in2) at 316 ◦ C (600 ◦ F).<br />
Figure 3.8. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. Outside-packed floating-head exchanger.<br />
Type AEP. (Standard of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
There are no limitations upon the number of tube-side passes or upon the tube-side<br />
design pressure and temperature. The outside-packed floating-head exchanger was the<br />
most commonly used type of removable- bundle construction in chemical-plant service.<br />
The floating-tube-sheet skirt, where in contact with the rings of packing, has fine machine<br />
finish. A split shear ring is inserted into a groove in the floating-tube-sheet skirt. A slipon<br />
backing flange, which in service is held in place by the shear ring, bolts to the external<br />
floating- head cover. The floating-head cover is usually a circular disk. With an odd<br />
number of tube-side passes, an axial nozzle can be installed in such a floating- head cover.<br />
If a side nozzle is required, the circular disk is replaced by either a dished head or a channel<br />
barrel (similar to Fig. 11-36f ) bolted between floating-head cover and floating-tube-sheet<br />
skirt. The outer tube limit approaches the inside of the skirt but is farther removed from<br />
the inside of the shell than for any of the previously discussed constructions. Clearances<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
40 3 Code and standards<br />
between shell diameter and bundle OTL are 22 mm (7.8 in) for small-diameter pipe shells,<br />
44 mm (1e in) for large-diameter pipe shells, and 58 mm (2g in) for moderatediameter<br />
plate shells.<br />
Internal Floating-Head Exchanger: (Fig. 3.9) The internal floating-head design<br />
is used extensively in petroleum-refinery service, but in recent years there has been a<br />
decline in usage. The tube bundle is removable, and the floating tube sheet moves (or<br />
floats) to accommodate differential expansion between shell and tubes. The outer tube<br />
limit approaches the inside diameter of the gasket at the floating tube sheet. Clearances<br />
(between shell and OTL) are 29 mm for pipe shells and 37 mm for moderatediameter plate<br />
shells. A split backing ring and bolting usually hold the floating-head cover at the floating<br />
tube sheet. These are located beyond the end of the shell and within the larger-diameter<br />
shell cover. Shell cover, split backing ring, and floating-head cover must be removed before<br />
the tube bundle can pass through the exchanger shell. With an even number of tube-side<br />
passes the floating-head cover serves as return cover for the tube-side fluid. With an odd<br />
number of passes a nozzle pipe must extend from the floating-head cover through the shell<br />
cover. Provision for both differential expansion and tube-bundle removal must be made.<br />
Figure 3.9. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. Internal floating head (pull- through<br />
design). Type AES. (Standard of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
Figure 3.10. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. Exchanger with packed floating tube<br />
sheet and lantern ring. Type AES. (Standard of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association,<br />
6th ed., 1978.)<br />
Pull-Through Floating-Head Exchanger: (Fig. 3.12) Construction is similar to that<br />
of the internal-floating-head split-backing ring exchanger except that the floating-head<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.3 Shell Constructions 41<br />
cover bolts directly to the floating tube sheet. The tube bundle can be withdrawn from<br />
the shell without removing either shell cover or floating-head cover. This feature reduces<br />
maintenance time during inspection and repair.<br />
The large clearance between the tubes and the shell must provide for both the gasket<br />
and the bolting at the floating-head cover. This clearance is about 2 to 2.5 times that<br />
required by the split-ring design. Sealing strips or dummy tubes are often installed to<br />
reduce bypassing of the tube bundle.<br />
Figure 3.11. <strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger-component nomenclature. Kettle-type floating-head reboiler.<br />
Type AKT. (Standard of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, 6th ed., 1978.)<br />
3.3 Shell Constructions<br />
• The most common TEMA shell type is the E shell as it is most suitable for most<br />
industrial process cooling applications. However, for certain applications, other<br />
shells offer distinct advantages. For example, the TEMA-F shell design provides<br />
for a longitudinal flow plate to be installed inside the tube bundle assembly. This<br />
plate causes the shell fluid to travel down one half of the tube bundle, then down<br />
the other half, in effect producing a counter-current flow pattern which is best for<br />
heat transfer. This type of construction can be specified where a close approach<br />
temperature is required and when the flow rate permits the use of one half of the<br />
shell at a time. In heat recovery applications, or where the application calls for<br />
increased thermal length to achieve effective overall heat transfer, shells can be<br />
installed with the flows in series. Up to six shorter shells in series is common and<br />
results in counter-current flow close to performance as if one long shell in a single<br />
pass design were used.<br />
• TEMA G and H shell designs are most suitable for phase change applications where<br />
the bypass around the longitudinal plate and counter-current flow is less important<br />
than even flow distribution. In this type of shell, the longitudinal plate offers<br />
better flow distribution in vapor streams and helps to flush out non-condensable.<br />
They are frequently specified for use in horizontal thermosiphon reboilers and total<br />
condensers.<br />
• TEMA J Shells are typically specified for phase change duties where significantly<br />
reduced shell side pressure drops are required. They are commonly used in stacked<br />
sets with the single nozzles used as the inlet and outlet. A special type of J-shell<br />
is used for flooded evaporation of shell side fluids. A separate vapor disengagement<br />
vessel without tubes is installed above the main J shell with the vapor outlet at the<br />
top of this vessel. The<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
42 3 Code and standards<br />
• TEMA K shell, also termed a kettle reboiler, is specified when the shell side stream<br />
will undergo vaporization. The liquid level of a K shell design should just cover the<br />
tube bundle, which fills the smaller diameter end of the shell. This liquid level is<br />
controlled by the liquid flowing over a weir at the far end of the entrance nozzle. The<br />
expanded shell area serves to facilitate vapor disengagement for boiling liquid in the<br />
bottom of the shell. To insure against excessive liquid carry-though with the vapor<br />
stream, a separate vessel as described above is specified. Liquid carry-through can<br />
also be minimized by installing a mesh demister at the vapor exit nozzle. U-bundles<br />
are typically used with K shell designs. K shells are expensive for high pressure<br />
vaporization due to shell diameter and the required wall thickness.<br />
• The TEMA X shell, or crossflow shell is most commonly used in vapor condensing<br />
applications, though it can also be used effectively in low pressure gas cooling or<br />
heating. It produces a very low shell side pressure drop, and is therefore most<br />
suitable for vacuum service condensing. In order to assure adequate distribution<br />
of vapors, X-shell designs typically feature an area free of tubes along the top of<br />
the exchanger. It is also typical to design X shell condensers with a flow area at<br />
the bottom of the tube bundle to allow free condensate flow to the exit nozzle.<br />
Careful attention to the effective removal of non-condensables is vital to X-shell<br />
constructions.<br />
3.4 Tube side construction<br />
3.4.1 Tube-Side Header:<br />
The tube-side header (or stationary head) contains one or more flow nozzles.<br />
• The bonnet (Fig. 3.1B) bolts to the shell. It is necessary to remove the bonnet in<br />
order to examine the tube ends. The fixed-tubesheet exchanger of Fig. 3.1b has<br />
bonnets at both ends of the shell.<br />
• The channel (Fig. 3.1A) has a removable channel cover. The tube ends can be<br />
examined by removing this cover without disturbing the piping connections to the<br />
channel nozzles. The channel can bolt to the shell as shown in Fig. 3.1a and c.<br />
The Type C and Type N channels of Fig. 3.1 are welded to the tube sheet. This<br />
design is comparable in cost with the bonnet but has the advantages of permitting<br />
access to the tubes without disturbing the piping connections and of eliminating a<br />
gasketed joint.<br />
• Special High-Pressure Closures (Fig. 3.1D) The channel barrel and the tube sheet<br />
are generally forged. The removable channel cover is seated in place by hydrostatic<br />
pressure, while a shear ring subjected to shearing stress absorbs the end force. For<br />
pressures above 6205 kPa (900 lbf/in2) these designs are generally more economical<br />
than bolted constructions, which require larger flanges and bolting as pressure increases<br />
in order to contain the end force with bolts in tension. Relatively light-gauge<br />
internal pass partitions are provided to direct the flow of tube-side fluids but are<br />
designed only for the differential pressure across the tube bundle.<br />
3.4.2 Tube-Side Passes<br />
Most exchangers have an even number of tube-side passes. The fixed-tube-sheet exchanger<br />
(which has no shell cover) usually has a return cover without any flow nozzles as shown in<br />
Fig. 3.1M; Types L and N are also used. All removable-bundle designs (except for the U<br />
tube) have a floating-head cover directing the flow of tube-side fluid at the floating tube<br />
sheet.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.4 Tube side construction 43<br />
3.4.3 Tubes Type<br />
There are different type of tubes used in heat exchangers. These are<br />
1. Plain tube<br />
(a) Straight tube<br />
(b) U-tube with a U-bend<br />
(c) Coiled tubes<br />
2. Finned tube<br />
3. Duplex or bimetallic tube. These tube are in reality two tube of different materials,<br />
one closely fitted over the other with no gap between them. They are made by<br />
drawing the outer tube onto the inner one or by shrink fitting. These are used<br />
where corrosive nature of the tube side fluid is such that no one metal or alloy is<br />
compatible with fluids.<br />
4. Enhanced surface tube<br />
1. Plain tube<br />
Standard heat-exchanger tubing is (1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 1, 1 1/4, 1 1/2 inch in<br />
outside diameter (1 inch= 25.4 mm). Wall thickness is measured in Birmingham<br />
wire gauge (BWG) units. The most commonly used tubes in chemical plants and<br />
petroleum refineries are 19- and 25-mm (3/4- and 1-in) outside diameter. Standard<br />
tube lengths are 8, 10, 12, 16, and 20 ft, with 20 ft now the most common ( 1 ft=<br />
0.3048 m).<br />
Manufacturing tolerances for steel, stainless-steel, and nickel alloy tubes are such<br />
that the tubing is produced to either average or minimum wall thickness. Seamless<br />
carbon steel tube of minimum wall thickness may vary from 0 to 20 percent above the<br />
nominal wall thickness. Average-wall seamless tubing has an allowable variation of<br />
plus or minus 10 percent. Welded carbon steel tube is produced to closer tolerances<br />
(0 to plus 18 percent on minimum wall; plus or minus 9 percent on average wall).<br />
Tubing of aluminum, copper, and their alloys can be drawn easily and usually is<br />
made to minimum wall specifications.<br />
Common practice is to specify exchanger surface in terms of total external square<br />
feet of tubing. The effective outside heat-transfer surface is based on the length of<br />
tubes measured between the inner faces of tube sheets. In most heat exchangers<br />
there is little difference between the total and the effective surface. Significant<br />
differences are usually found in high-pressure and double-tube-sheet designs.<br />
Tube thickness The tube should be able to stand:<br />
(a) pressure on the inside and out side of the tube<br />
(b) temperature on both the sides<br />
(c) thermal stress due to the differential expansion of the shell and the tube bundle<br />
(d) corrosive nature of both the shell-side and the tube side fluid<br />
The tube thickness is given a function of the tube out side diameter in accordance<br />
with B.W.G.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
44 3 Code and standards<br />
Figure 3.12. Tube thickness<br />
2. Finned tube: As the name implies, finned tube have fins to the tubular surface.<br />
Fins can be longtiudinal, radial or helical and may be on the outside or inside or on<br />
both sides of the tube. Fig. 5.7shows some of the commonly used fins. The fins are<br />
generally used when at least one of the fluid is gas.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.4 Tube side construction 45<br />
Figure 3.13. Examples of extended surfaces on one or both sides. (a) Radial fins. (b) Serrated<br />
radial fins. (c) Studded surface. (d) Joint between tubesheet and low fin tube with three times<br />
bare surface. (e) External axial fins. ( f ) Internal axial fins. (9) Finned surface with internal<br />
spiral to promote turbulence. (h) Plate fins on both sides. (i) Tubes and plate fins.<br />
(a) Integrally finned tube, which is available in a variety of alloys and sizes, is<br />
being used in shell-and-tube heat exchangers. The fins are radially extruded<br />
from thick-walled tube to a height of 1.6 mm (1/16 in) spaced at 1.33 mm (19<br />
fins per inch) or to a height of 3.2 mm (1/8 in) spaced at 2.3 mm (11 fins per<br />
inch). External surface is approximately 2 1/2 times the outside surface of a<br />
bare tube with the same outside diameter. Also available are 0.93-mm- (0.037in-)<br />
high fins spaced 0.91 mm (28 fins per inch) with an external surface about<br />
3.5 times the surface of the bare tube. Bare ends of nominal tube diameter are<br />
provided, while the fin height is slightly less than this diameter. The tube can<br />
be inserted into a conventional tube bundle and rolled or welded to the tube<br />
sheet by the same means, used for bare tubes. An integrally finned tube rolled<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
46 3 Code and standards<br />
into a tube sheet with double serrations and flared at the inlet is shown in<br />
Fig. 11-39. Internally finned tubes have been manufactured but have limited<br />
application.<br />
(b) Longitudinal fins are commonly used in double-pipe exchangers upon the<br />
outside of the inner tube. U-tube and conventional removable tube bundles<br />
are also made from such tubing. The ratio of external to internal surface<br />
generally is about 10 or 15:1.<br />
(c) Transverse fins upon tubes are used in low-pressure gas services. The primary<br />
application is in air-cooled heat exchangers (as discussed under that heading),<br />
but shell-and-tube exchangers with these tubes are in service.<br />
3. Bimetallic Tubes When corrosive requirements or temperature conditions do not<br />
permit the use of a single alloy for the tubes, bimetallic (or duplex) tubes may be<br />
used. These can be made from almost any possible combination of metals. Tube<br />
sizes and gauges can be varied. For thin gauges the wall thickness is generally<br />
divided equally between the two components. In heavier gauges the more expensive<br />
component may comprise from a fifth to a third of the total thickness.<br />
The component materials comply with applicable ASTM specifications, but after<br />
manufacture the outer component may increase in hardness beyond specification<br />
limits, and special care is required during the tube-rolling operation. When the<br />
harder material is on the outside, precautions must be exercised to expand the<br />
tube properly. When the inner material is considerably softer, rolling may not be<br />
practical unless ferrules of the soft material are used.<br />
In order to eliminate galvanic action the outer tube material may be stripped from<br />
the tube ends and replaced with ferrules of the inner tube material. When the end<br />
of a tube with a ferrule is expanded or welded to a tube sheet, the tube-side fluid<br />
can contact only the inner tube material, while the outer material is exposed to the<br />
shell-side fluid. Bimetallic tubes are available from a small number of tube mills<br />
and are manufactured only on special order and in large quantities.<br />
4. Enhance surface These kind of tubes enhance the heat transfer coefficient (Fig.<br />
5.7h,i). This may be achieved by two techniques.<br />
(a) The surface is contoured or grooved in a variety of ways forming valley and<br />
ridges. These are applicable in condenser and.<br />
(b) The surface is prepared with special coating to provide a large number of<br />
nucleation sites for use in boiling operations.<br />
3.4.4 Tube arrangement<br />
The tubes in an exchanger are usually arranged in an equilateral triangular, aquare or<br />
rotated square pattern see fig.3.14.<br />
The triangular and rotated square pattern give higher heat transfer rates, but at the<br />
expenses of higher pressure drop than the the square pattern. Square or rotated square<br />
are used for hihger fouling fluid, where it is necessary to mechanically clean the outside<br />
of the tubes. The recommend tube pitch is Pt = 1.25do. Where square pattern is used<br />
for easer of cleaning, the recommended minimum clearance between the tubes is 0.25 in<br />
(6.4 mm)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.5 Shell side construction 47<br />
Flow<br />
d o<br />
Square pitch<br />
p t<br />
3.4.5 Tube side passes<br />
p t<br />
Equilateral triangular pitch<br />
Figure 3.14. Tube patterns.<br />
d o<br />
Rotaed square<br />
The fluid in the tube is usually directed to flow back and forth in a number of passes<br />
through groups of tube arranged in parallel to increase the length of the flow path. The<br />
number of passes is selected to give the required side design velocity. <strong>Exchangers</strong> are built<br />
form one to up to 16 passes. The tube are arranged into the number of passes required by<br />
dividing up the exchanger headers (channels) with partition plates (pass partition) The<br />
arrangement of the pass partition for 2,4 and 6 are shown in fig.3.19<br />
5<br />
2<br />
1<br />
2<br />
1<br />
6<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Two tube passes<br />
5<br />
2<br />
1<br />
2<br />
Four tube passes<br />
Six tube passes<br />
Figure 3.15. Tube arrangement: showing pass-partitions in headers.<br />
3.5 Shell side construction<br />
3.5.1 Shell Sizes<br />
<strong>Heat</strong>-exchanger shells are generally made from standard- wall steel pipe in sizes up to<br />
305-mm (12-in) diameter; from 9.5-mm (3/8 in) wall pipe in sizes from 356 to 610 mm<br />
(14 to 24 in); and from steel plate rolled at discrete intervals in larger sizes. Clearances<br />
between the outer tube limit and the shell are discussed elsewhere in connection with the<br />
different types of construction.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
3<br />
4<br />
1<br />
6<br />
3<br />
4<br />
p t
48 3 Code and standards<br />
3.5.2 Shell-Side Arrangements<br />
1. The one-pass shell (Fig. 3.1E) is the most commonly used arrangement. Condensers<br />
from single component vapors often have the nozzles moved to the center<br />
of the shell for vacuum and steam services. Solid longitudinal baffle is provided to<br />
form a two-pass shell (Fig. 3.1F). It may be insulated to improve thermal efficiency.<br />
(See further discussion on baffles).<br />
2. A two-pass shell can improve thermal effectiveness at a cost lower than for two<br />
shells in series.<br />
3. For split flow (Fig. 3.1G), the longitudinal baffle may be solid or perforated. The<br />
latter feature is used with condensing vapors.<br />
4. double-split-flow design is shown in Fig. 3.1H. The longitudinal baffles may be<br />
solid or perforated.<br />
5. The divided flow design (Fig. 3.1J), mechanically is like the one-pass shell except<br />
for the addition of a nozzle. Divided flow is used to meet low-pressure-drop<br />
requirements. The kettle reboiler is shown in Fig. 3.1K. When nucleate boiling is<br />
to be done on the shell-side, this common design provides adequate dome space for<br />
separation of vapor and liquid above the tube bundle and surge capacity beyond<br />
the weir near the shell cover.<br />
3.6 Baffles and tube bundles<br />
3.6.1 The tube bundle<br />
Tube bundle is the most important part of a tubular heat exchanger. The tubes generally<br />
constitute the most expensive component of the exchanger and are the one most likely to<br />
corrode. Tube sheets, baffles, or support plates, tie rods, and usually spacers complete<br />
the bundle.<br />
3.6.2 Baffle<br />
Baffles are used to direct the side and tube side flows so that the fluid velocity is increased<br />
to obtain higher heat transfer rate and reduce fouling deposits. In horizontal units baffle<br />
are used to provide support against sagging and vibration damage. There are different<br />
types of baffles:<br />
1. segemntal<br />
2. disc and doughnut<br />
3. orifice<br />
4. rod type<br />
5. nest type<br />
6. longitudinal<br />
7. impingment<br />
1. Segmental Baffles Segmental or cross-flow baffles are standard. Single, double,<br />
and triple segmental baffles are used. Baffle cuts are illustrated in Fig. 3.16a. The<br />
double segmental baffle reduces crossflow velocity for a given baffle spacing. The<br />
triple segmental baffle reduces both cross-flow and long-flow velocities and has been<br />
identified as the window-cut baffle.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.6 Baffles and tube bundles 49<br />
Figure 3.16. Types of baffle used in shell and tube heat exchanger. (a) Segmental. (b)<br />
Segmental and strip. (c) Disc and doughnut. (d) Oriffice.<br />
Minimum baffle spacing is generally one-fifth of the shell diameter and not less<br />
than 50.8 mm (2 in). Maximum baffle spacing is limited by the requirement to<br />
provide adequate support for the tubes. The maximum unsupported tube span<br />
in inches equals 74d 0.75 (where d is the outside tube diameter in inches). The<br />
unsupported tube span is reduced by about 12 percent for aluminum, copper, and<br />
their alloys.<br />
Baffles are provided for heat-transfer purposes. When shell-side baffles are not<br />
required for heat-transfer purposes, as may be the case in condensers or reboilers,<br />
tube supports are installed.<br />
Maximum baffle cut is limited to about 45 percent for single segmental baffles so<br />
that every pair of baffles will support each tube. Tube bundles are generally provided<br />
with baffles cut so that at least one row of tubes passes through all the baffles<br />
or support plates. These tubes hold the entire bundle together. In pipe-shell exchangers<br />
with a horizontal baffle cut and a horizontal pass rib for directing tube<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
a<br />
b<br />
c<br />
d
50 3 Code and standards<br />
side flow in the channel, the maximum baffle cut, which permits a minimum of one<br />
row of tubes to pass through all baffles, is approximately 33 percent in small shells<br />
and 40 percent in larger pipe shells.<br />
Maximum shell-side heat-transfer rates in forced convection are apparently obtained<br />
by cross-flow of the fluid at right angles to the tubes. In order to maximize this<br />
type of flow some heat exchangers are built with segmental-cut baffles and with no<br />
tubes in the window (or the baffle cutout). Maximum baffle spacing may thus equal<br />
maximum unsupported-tube span, while conventional baffle spacing is limited to<br />
one-half of this span.<br />
The maximum baffle spacing for no tubes in the window of single segmental baffles<br />
is unlimited when intermediate supports are provided. These are cut on both sides<br />
of the baffle and therefore do not affect the flow of the shell-side fluid. Each support<br />
engages all the tubes; the supports are spaced to provide adequate support for the<br />
tubes.<br />
2. Rod Baffles Rod or bar baffles (fig. 3.17) have either rods or bars extending<br />
through the lanes between rows of tubes. A baffle set can consist of a baffle with<br />
rods in all the vertical lanes and another baffle with rods in all the horizontal lanes<br />
between the tubes. The shell-side flow is uniform and parallel to the tubes. Stagnant<br />
areas do not exist.<br />
One device uses four baffles in a baffle set. Only half of either the vertical or the<br />
horizontal tube lanes in a baffle have rods. The new design apparently provides a<br />
maximum shell-side heat-transfer coefficient for a given pressure drop.<br />
Figure 3.17. Rod baffles.<br />
3. Impingement Baffle The tube bundle is customarily protected against impingement<br />
by the incoming fluid at the shell inlet nozzle when the shell-side fluid is at a<br />
high velocity, is condensing, or is a twophase fluid. Minimum entrance area about<br />
the nozzle is generally equal to the inlet nozzle area. Exit nozzles also require adequate<br />
area between the tubes and the nozzles. A full bundle without any provision<br />
for shell inlet nozzle area can increase the velocity of the inlet fluid by as much as<br />
300 percent with a consequent loss in pressure.<br />
Impingement baffles are generally made of rectangular plate, although circular plates<br />
(Fig. 3.18) are more desirable. Rods and other devices are sometimes used to<br />
protect the tubes from impingement. In order to maintain a maximum tube count<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.6 Baffles and tube bundles 51<br />
the impingement plate is often placed in a conical nozzle opening or in a dome cap<br />
above the shell.<br />
Impingement baffles or flow-distribution devices are recommended for axial tubeside<br />
nozzles when entrance velocity is high.<br />
(a)<br />
(c)<br />
Figure 3.18. Impingment baffless;(a)Flat plate (b)curved plate (c)expanded or flared nozzle<br />
(d) jacket type.<br />
4. Longitudinal Flow Baffles In fixed-tube-sheet construction with multipass shells,<br />
the baffle is usually welded to the shell and positive assurance against bypassing<br />
results. Removable tube bundles have a sealing device between the shell and the<br />
longitudinal baffle. Flexible light-gauge sealing strips and various packing devices<br />
have been used. Removable U-tube bundles with four tube-side passes and two<br />
shell-side passes can be installed in shells with the longitudinal baffle welded in<br />
place.<br />
In split-flow shells the longitudinal baffle may be installed without a positive seal<br />
at the edges if design conditions are not seriously affected by a limited amount of<br />
bypassing.<br />
Fouling in petroleum-refinery service has necessitated rough treatment of tube bundles<br />
during cleaning operations. Many refineries avoid the use of longitudinal baffles,<br />
since the sealing devices are subject to damage during cleaning and maintenance<br />
operations.<br />
3.6.3 Vapor Distribution<br />
Relatively large shell inlet nozzles, which may be used in condensers under low pressure<br />
or vacuum, require provision for uniform vapor distribution.<br />
3.6.4 Tube-Bundle Bypassing<br />
Shell-side heat-transfer rates are maximized when bypassing of the tube bundle is at a<br />
minimum. The most significant bypass stream is generally between the outer tube limit<br />
and the inside of the shell. The clearance between tubes and shell is at a minimum for<br />
fixed-tube-sheet construction and is greatest for straight-tube removable bundles. Arrangements<br />
to reduce tube-bundle bypassing include:<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
(B)<br />
(d)
52 3 Code and standards<br />
1. Dummy tubes. These tubes do not pass through the tube sheets and can be<br />
located close to the inside of the shell.<br />
2. Tie rods with spacers. These hold the baffles in place but can be located to<br />
prevent bypassing.<br />
3. Sealing strips. These longitudinal strips either extend from baffle to baffle or may<br />
be inserted in slots cut into the baffles.<br />
4. Dummy tubes or tie rods with spacers may be located within the pass partition<br />
lanes (and between the baffle cuts) in order to ensure maximum bundle penetration<br />
by the shell-side fluid.<br />
When tubes are omitted from the tube layout to provide entrance area about an<br />
impingement plate, the need for sealing strips or other devices to cause proper<br />
bundle penetration by the shell-side fluid is increased.<br />
3.6.5 Tie Rods and Spacers<br />
Tie rods are used to hold the baffles in place with spacers, which are pieces of tubing or<br />
pipe placed on the rods to locate the baffles. Occasionally baffles are welded to the tie<br />
rods, and spacers are eliminated. Properly located tie rods and spacers serve both to hold<br />
the bundle together and to reduce bypassing of the tubes.<br />
In very large fixed-tube-sheet units, in which concentricity of shells decreases, baffles are<br />
occasionally welded to the shell to eliminate bypassing between the baffle and the shell.<br />
Metal baffles are standard. Occasionally plastic baffles are used either to reduce corrosion<br />
or in vibratory service, in which metal baffles may cut the tubes.<br />
Rods<br />
3.6.6 Tubesheets<br />
Spacer<br />
baffle<br />
Figure 3.19. Baffle spacers and tie rods.<br />
Tube plate<br />
Tubesheets are usually made from a round flat piece of metal with holes drilled for the<br />
tube ends in a precise location and pattern relative to one another. Tube sheet materials<br />
range as tube materials. Tubes are attached to the tube sheet by pneumatic or hydraulic<br />
pressure or by roller expansion. Tube holes can be drilled and reamed and can be machined<br />
with one or more grooves. This greatly increases the strength of the tube joint.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
3.6 Baffles and tube bundles 53<br />
3 mm<br />
a<br />
0.4mm<br />
Figure 3.20. Tube sheet joint<br />
b c<br />
The tubesheet is in contact with both fluids and so must have corrosion resistance allowances<br />
and have metalurgical and electrochemical properties appropriate for the fluids<br />
and velocities. Low carbon steel tube sheets can include a layer of a higher alloy metal<br />
bonded to the surface to provide more effective corrosion resistance without the expense<br />
of using the solid alloy. The tube hole pattern or pitch varies the distance from one tube<br />
to the other and angle of the tubes relative to each other and to the direction of flow. This<br />
allows the manipulation of fluid velocities and pressure drop, and provides the maximum<br />
amount of turbulance and tube surface contact for effective heat transfer. Where the<br />
tube and tube sheet materials are joinable, weldable metals, the tube joint can be further<br />
strengthened by applying a seal weld or strength weld to the joint. A strength weld has<br />
a tube slightly reccessed inside the tube hole or slightly extended beyond the tube sheet.<br />
The weld adds metal to the resulting lip. A seal weld is specified to help prevent the<br />
shell and tube liquids from intermixing. In this treatment, the tube is flush with the tube<br />
sheet surface. The weld does not add metal, but rather fuses the two materials. In cases<br />
where it is critical to avoid fluid intermixing, a double tube sheet can be provided. In this<br />
design, the outer tube sheet is outside the shell circuit, virtually eliminating the chance<br />
of fluid intermixing. The inner tube sheet is vented to atmosphere so any fluid leak is<br />
easily detected.<br />
Mechanisms of attaching tubes to tube sheet<br />
• Rolled Tube Joints Expanded tube-to-tube-sheet joints are standard. Properly<br />
rolled joints have uniform tightness to minimize tube fractures, stress corrosion,<br />
tube-sheet ligament pushover and enlargement, and dishing of the tube sheet. Tubes<br />
are expanded into the tube sheet for a length of two tube diameters, or 50 mm (2<br />
in), or tube-sheet thickness minus 3 mm (1/8 in). Generally tubes are rolled for the<br />
last of these alternatives. The expanded portion should never extend beyond the<br />
shell-side face of the tube sheet, since removing such a tube is extremely difficult.<br />
Methods and tools for tube removal and tube rolling were discussed by John, 1959.<br />
Tube ends may be projecting, flush, flared, or beaded (listed in order of usage). The<br />
flare or bell-mouth tube end is usually restricted to water service in condensers and<br />
serves to reduce erosion near the tube inlet.<br />
For moderate general process requirements at gauge pressures less than 2058 kPa<br />
(300 lbf/in2) and less than 177 ◦ C (350 ◦ F), tube-sheet holes without grooves are<br />
standard. For all other services with expanded tubes at least two grooves in each<br />
tube hole are common. The number of grooves is sometimes changed to one or three<br />
in proportion to tube-sheet thickness.<br />
• Expanding the tube into the grooved tube holes provides a stronger joint but<br />
results in greater difficulties during tube removal (see Fig. 3.20a).<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
54 3 Code and standards<br />
• Welded Tube Joints When suitable materials of construction are used, the tube<br />
ends may be welded to the tube sheets. Welded joints may be seal-welded for additional<br />
tightness beyond that of tube rolling or may be strength-welded. Strengthwelded<br />
joints have been found satisfactory in very severe services. Welded joints<br />
may or may not be rolled before or after welding (see Fig. 3.20b).<br />
The variables in tube-end welding were discussed in two unpublished papers [39] and<br />
[119]. Tube-end rolling before welding may leave lubricant from the tube expander in<br />
the tube hole. Fouling during normal operation followed by maintenance operations<br />
will leave various impurities in and near the tube ends. Satisfactory welds are rarely<br />
possible under such conditions, since tube-end welding requires extreme cleanliness<br />
in the area to be welded.<br />
• Tube expansion after welding has been found useful for low and moderate pressures.<br />
In high-pressure service tube rolling has not been able to prevent leakage<br />
after weld failure.<br />
• Double-Tube-Sheet Joints This design prevents the passage of either fluid into<br />
the other because of leakage at the tube-to-tubesheet joints, which are generally the<br />
weakest points in heat exchangers. Any leakage at these joints admits the fluid to<br />
the gap between the tube sheets. Mechanical design, fabrication, and maintenance<br />
of double- tube-sheet designs require special consideration (see Fig. 3.20c).<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
4 Basic <strong>Design</strong> Equations of <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong><br />
There are two types of design problems: sizing and rating. In sizing the main objective<br />
is to find the geometry of the heat exchanger. Rating is to find the duty or performance<br />
for a given geometry.<br />
RATING SIZING<br />
Given: Geometry Given: Q(duty)<br />
mh, Ch, Th1, ∆ph mh, Ch, Th1, ∆ph<br />
mc, Cc, Tc1, ∆pc<br />
mc, Cc, Tc1, ∆pc<br />
Find: Q(Duty) Find: Geometry<br />
The are three design approaches generally used in the design of heat exchanger. These<br />
are<br />
• LMTD-method,<br />
• NTU-ε-method and<br />
• θ-method.<br />
These notation are explained in the respective sections.<br />
4.1 LMTD-Method<br />
Assumptions<br />
• Steady state flow (mh, mc)<br />
• Constant overall heat transfer coefficient (U)<br />
• Constant specific heat (Cph, Cpc)<br />
• negligible heat loss to surrounding<br />
<strong>Heat</strong> Transfer (or rate equation)<br />
where<br />
55<br />
Q = UA∆TlmF (4.1)<br />
Q = heat transferred per unit time W (duty)<br />
U = overall heat transfer coefficient<br />
A = heat transfer area<br />
∆Tlm = logarithmic mean temperature difference<br />
F = temperature correction factor<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
56 4 Basic <strong>Design</strong> Equations of <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong><br />
4.1.1 Logarithmic mean temperature different<br />
∆Tlm = ∆T2 − ∆T1<br />
ln(∆T2/∆T1)<br />
(4.2)<br />
The temperature difference ∆T1, ∆T2 for different tube heat exchanger are defined below:<br />
T hi<br />
T ci<br />
T ci<br />
T hi<br />
T ho<br />
ΔT 1 ΔT2<br />
Cocurrent<br />
T co<br />
T co<br />
T ho<br />
Thi ΔT1 Tco T co<br />
T hi<br />
Counter current<br />
Tho ΔT2 T ci<br />
T ci<br />
T ho<br />
ΔT 1<br />
T hi<br />
T hi<br />
Figure 4.1. Temperature distribution<br />
∆T1<br />
∆T2<br />
Cocurrent Thi − Tci Tho − Tco<br />
Counter current Thi − Tco Tho − Tci<br />
Shell and tube Thi − Tco Tho − Tci<br />
Plate heat exchanger Thi − Tco Tho − Tci<br />
T c<br />
Shell and Tube<br />
Example 1 water at a rate of 68 kg/min is heated from 35 to 65 o C by an oil having a<br />
specific heat of 1.9 kJ/kg o C. The oil enters the exchanger at 110 o C and leaves at 75 o C.<br />
Calculate the logarithmic mean temperature difference for<br />
1. counter current<br />
2. co-current<br />
Solution<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
T ho<br />
T ho<br />
T co<br />
T ci<br />
T ci<br />
T co
4.1 LMTD-Method 57<br />
Thi =110 C o<br />
Tci = 35 C o Tci = 35 C o<br />
T ci<br />
T hi<br />
Tho=75 C o<br />
ΔT 1 =75<br />
ΔT =10oC Cocurrent<br />
1. counter current (see Fig.4.2)<br />
2. co-current (see Fig.4.2)<br />
Tco =65 C o<br />
T co<br />
T ho<br />
2<br />
ΔT1 =45 C o<br />
Thi=110 C o<br />
Tco =65 C o<br />
T co<br />
T hi<br />
Counter current<br />
Figure 4.2. Temperature distribution<br />
∆Tlm = ∆T2 − ∆T1<br />
ln(∆T2/∆T1)<br />
∆Tlm = ∆T2 − ∆T1<br />
ln(∆T2/∆T1)<br />
4.1.2 Correction Factor<br />
• For double pipe heat exchanger<br />
Tho=75 C o<br />
ΔT C<br />
2=40 o<br />
Tci= 35 C o<br />
T ci<br />
T ho<br />
= 10 − 75<br />
ln(10/75) = 32.26o C (4.3)<br />
= 40 − 45<br />
ln(40/45) = 42.45o C (4.4)<br />
F = 1 (4.5)<br />
• Shell and tube heat exchanger. For a 1 shell 2 tube pass exchanger the correction<br />
factor is given by:<br />
<br />
(R<br />
F =<br />
2 + 1) ln <br />
1−S<br />
1−RS<br />
⎧ √ ⎫<br />
⎨ 2−S R+1− (R2 +1) ⎬<br />
(R − 1) ln √ <br />
⎩ 2−S R+1− (R2 +1) ⎭<br />
(4.6)<br />
where<br />
or in words<br />
R =<br />
Range of shell fluid<br />
, S =<br />
Range of tube fluid<br />
R = T1 − T2<br />
, S =<br />
t2 − t1<br />
t2 − t1<br />
T1 − t1<br />
Range of tube fluid<br />
Maximum temperature difference<br />
(4.7)<br />
(4.8)<br />
the derivation of the equation 4.6 is given by Kern (1950). The equation can be<br />
used for any exchanger with an even number of tube passes and is plotted in Fig.4.4.<br />
The correction factor for 2 shell passes and 4 or multiple of 4 tube passes is<br />
<br />
R2+1 ln 2(R−1)<br />
F =<br />
1−S<br />
1−RS<br />
ln 2/S−1−R+(2/S)<br />
√ √ (4.9)<br />
(1−S)(1−RS)+ R2 +1<br />
These equations are plotted on fig.4.4<br />
√ √<br />
2/S−1−R+(2/S) (1−S)(1−RS)− R2 +1<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
58 4 Basic <strong>Design</strong> Equations of <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong><br />
Example 1 For example calculate the correction factor for<br />
1. 1-2 shell and tube heat exchanger and<br />
2. 2-4 shell and tube heat exchanger<br />
using the equation and the graph.<br />
T1 = 35 o C, T2 = 65 o C, t1 = 110 o C, t2 = 75 o C<br />
R = T1 − T2<br />
t2 − t1<br />
= 35 − 65<br />
From the graph of fig.4.4<br />
75 − 110 = 0.86, S = t2 − t1<br />
T1 − t1<br />
1. for 1-2 shell and tube heat exchanger F=0.92<br />
2. for 2-4 shell and tube heat exchanger F=0.98<br />
T 2<br />
t 1<br />
t 2<br />
= 75 − 110<br />
35 − 110<br />
1-2 Shell and Tube<br />
2-4 Shell and Tube<br />
T1 T1 t1 T 2<br />
= 0.467 (4.10)<br />
Figure 4.3. Temperature distribution for 1-2 and 2-4 shell and tube heat exchanger<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
t 2
4.1 LMTD-Method 59<br />
Figure 4.4. Temperature correction factor: one shell, 2 shell pass, divide flow shell and split<br />
flow shell and cross flow<br />
4.1.3 Overall heat transfer coefficient<br />
Typical values of the overall heat transfer coefficient for various types of heat exchnager<br />
are given in . More expensive data can be found in in<br />
The determination of U is often tedious and needs data not yet available in preliminary<br />
stages of the design. Therefore, typical values of U are useful for quickly estimating the<br />
required surface area. The literature has many tabulations of such typical coefficients for<br />
commercial heat transfer services.<br />
Following is a table 4.1 with values for different applications and heat exchanger types.<br />
More values can be found in the books as [29],[127], [113], [79], [93] and [14]<br />
The ranges given in the table are an indication for the order of magnitude. Lower values<br />
are for unfavorable conditions such as lower flow velocities, higher viscosities, and additional<br />
fouling resistances. Higher values are for more favorable conditions. Coefficients<br />
of actual equipment may be smaller or larger than the values listed. Note that the values<br />
should not be used as a replacement of rigorous methods for the final design of heat<br />
exchangers, although they may serve as a useful check on the results obtained by these<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
60 4 Basic <strong>Design</strong> Equations of <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong><br />
methods.<br />
Table 4.1. Typical overall coefficient<br />
Hot Fluid Cold fluid U (W/m 2 o C)<br />
<strong>Heat</strong> exchangers<br />
Water Water 800-1500<br />
Organic solvents organic solvent 100-300<br />
light oils light oils 100-400<br />
heavy oils heavy oils 50-300<br />
Gases gass 10-50<br />
Coolers<br />
Organic solvents water 250-750<br />
light oils water 350-900<br />
heavy oils water60-900<br />
gase water 20-300<br />
organic solvent brine 150-500<br />
water brine 600-1200<br />
Gases Brine 15-250<br />
<strong>Heat</strong>ers<br />
Steam Water 1500-4000<br />
Steam organic solvent 500-1000<br />
Steam light oils 300-900<br />
Steam heavy oils 60-450<br />
Steam gass 30-300<br />
Dowtherm Heavy oils 50-300<br />
Dowtherm Gases 20-200<br />
flue gases steam 30-100<br />
flue gases hydrocarbon vapor 30-100<br />
Condensers<br />
Aqueous vapor water 1000-1500<br />
Organic vapor Water 700-1000<br />
Organic (some non condensable gases) Water 500-700<br />
Vacuum condensers Water 200-500<br />
Vaporizers<br />
Steam Aqueuos solutions 1000-1500<br />
Steam Light organics 900-1200<br />
Steam Heavy organics 600-900<br />
Alternatively the overall heat transfer coefficient is evalauted from the individual heat<br />
transfer coefficient as:<br />
1<br />
Uo<br />
= 1<br />
+<br />
ho<br />
1<br />
+<br />
hod<br />
do ln (do/di)<br />
+<br />
2kw<br />
do<br />
di<br />
1<br />
hi<br />
+ do<br />
di<br />
1<br />
hid<br />
(4.11)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
4.2 ε- NTU 61<br />
where<br />
Uo = the overall coefficient based on the outside area of the tubeW/m 2 o C<br />
ho = outside fluid film coefficient, W/m 2 o C<br />
hi = inside fluid film coefficient, W/m 2 o C<br />
hod = outside dirt coefficient (Fouling factor), W/m 2 o C<br />
hi = inside dirt coefficient,W/m 2 o C<br />
kw = thermal conductivity of the tube wall material, W/m o C<br />
do = tube outside diameter, m<br />
di = tube inside diameter, m<br />
4.1.4 <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
The heat transfer coefficient is governed by general function for forced convective as<br />
Nu = hd<br />
<br />
= f Re, P r,<br />
k d<br />
<br />
µ<br />
, (4.12)<br />
L µw<br />
and for natural convection as<br />
Nu = hd<br />
k<br />
= f<br />
<br />
Gr, P r, µ<br />
µw<br />
<br />
(4.13)<br />
<strong>Design</strong> equations for the heat transfer coefficient for various flow geometry (tube, plate)<br />
and configuration are given in Appendix 1. <strong>Design</strong> equation for the heat transfer coefficient<br />
for condensation and boiling is given also in appendix A.<br />
4.1.5 Fouling factor (hid, hod)<br />
<strong>Heat</strong> transfer may be degraded in time by corrosion, deposits of reaction products, organic<br />
growths, etc. These effects are accounted for quantitatively by fouling resistances.<br />
Extensive data on fouling factor are given TEMA standards. Typical fouling factors for<br />
common process and service fluids are given in the table 4.2. These values are for shell<br />
and tube heat exchangers with plain (not finned) tubes.<br />
4.2 ε- NTU<br />
The effectiveness (ε) of a heat exchanger is defined as the ratio between the actual heat<br />
load to the maximum possible heat load.<br />
ε = Q<br />
Qmax<br />
This is related to the heat exchanger size and capacity as<br />
Where NT U is number of transfer unit and is defined as<br />
(4.14)<br />
ε = f(NT U, C) (4.15)<br />
NT U = N = UA<br />
Cmin<br />
and C is the heat capacity ratio defined using energy equation as:<br />
(4.16)<br />
Q = MhCph(Thi − Tho) = McCpc(Tco − Tci) (4.17)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
62 4 Basic <strong>Design</strong> Equations of <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong><br />
Table 4.2. Fouling factor<br />
Fluid Coefficient (W/m 2 o C) Factor (resistance (m 2 o C/W )<br />
River water 3000-12000 0.003-0.0001<br />
Sea water 1000-3000 0.001-0.0003<br />
cooling water (towers) 3000-6000 0.0003-0.00017<br />
Towns water (soft) 3000-5000 0.0003-0.0002<br />
Towns water (hard) 1000-2000 0.001-0.0005<br />
Steam condensate 1500-5000 0.00067-0.0002<br />
Steam oil free 4000-10000 0.0025-0.00001<br />
Steam oil traces 2000-5000 0.0005-0.0002<br />
Refrigerated brine 3000-5000 0.0003-0.0002<br />
Air and industrial gases 5000-10000 0.0002-0.00001<br />
Flue gases 2000-5000 0.0005-0.0002<br />
Organic vapor 5000 0.0002<br />
Organic liquids 5000 0.0002<br />
Light hydrocarbons 5000 0.0002<br />
Heavy hydrocarbons 2000 0.0005<br />
Boiling organics 2500 0.0004<br />
Condensing organics 5000 0.0002<br />
Heavy transfer fluids 5000 0.0002<br />
Aqueous salt solutions 3000-5000 0.0003-0.0002<br />
MhCph < McCpc ⇒ Cmin = MhCph, Cmax = McCpc<br />
MhCpc > McCpc ⇒ Cmin = McCpc, Cmax = MhCph<br />
(4.18)<br />
(4.19)<br />
Qmax = Cmin(Thi − Tci) (4.20)<br />
C = Cmin<br />
Cmax<br />
εh = Thi − Tho<br />
, εc =<br />
Thi − Tci<br />
Tco − Tci<br />
Thi − Tci<br />
ε = ∆Tc<br />
Tspan<br />
where Tspan is defined in fig. 4.5 for counter current flow<br />
(4.21)<br />
(4.22)<br />
(4.23)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
4.2 ε- NTU 63<br />
T span<br />
Thi<br />
Tco<br />
Tho<br />
0 A<br />
Tci<br />
Figure 4.5. Temperature distribution in counter current flow<br />
The ε equation for various heat exchanger configuration is given as<br />
• Parallel flow<br />
• Counter current flow<br />
• Cross flow<br />
ε =<br />
ε =<br />
1. Both fluid unmixed mixed<br />
where<br />
2. Both fluid mixed<br />
ε =<br />
3. Cmax mixed, Cmin unmixed<br />
1 − exp [−N(1 + C)]<br />
1 + C<br />
1 − exp [−N(1 + C)]<br />
1 − C exp [−N(1 − C)]<br />
ε = 1 − exp<br />
<br />
exp(−NCn) − 1<br />
n = N −0.22<br />
Cn<br />
<br />
1<br />
1 − exp(−N) − 1 +<br />
−1 C<br />
1<br />
−<br />
1 − exp(−NC) − 1 N<br />
Δθ<br />
(4.24)<br />
(4.25)<br />
(4.26)<br />
(4.27)<br />
(4.28)<br />
ε = 1<br />
{1 − exp [−C (1 − exp(−N))]} (4.29)<br />
C<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
64 4 Basic <strong>Design</strong> Equations of <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong><br />
4. Cmax unmixed, Cmin mixed<br />
• One shell pass, 2,4, 6 tube passes<br />
• Condenser<br />
• Evaporator<br />
<br />
ε = 1 − exp − 1<br />
<br />
[1 − exp(−NC)]<br />
C<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨ <br />
ε = 2 1 + C + (1 + C<br />
⎪⎩ 2 <br />
1 + exp −N (1 + C<br />
) 2 ) <br />
1 − exp <br />
−N (1 + C2 ) <br />
⎫<br />
⎪⎬<br />
⎪⎭<br />
ε = 1 − e −N<br />
ε = 1 − e −N<br />
−1<br />
(4.30)<br />
(4.31)<br />
(4.32)<br />
(4.33)<br />
Alternatively these equations are presented in a graphical form. The various curves of ε<br />
vs NT U can be found in textbooks like Kern (1964( and Perry and Green (2000).<br />
4.3 Link between LMTD and NTU<br />
• Cocurrent<br />
• Counter current<br />
<br />
∆T1<br />
ln<br />
∆T2<br />
<br />
∆T1<br />
ln = ln<br />
∆T2<br />
<br />
Thi − Tci<br />
= ln<br />
= Nh + Nc<br />
Tho − Tco<br />
<br />
Thi − Tco<br />
Tho − Tci<br />
= Nh − Nc<br />
(4.34)<br />
(4.35)<br />
4.4 The Theta Method<br />
Alternative method of representing the performance of heat exchangers may be given by<br />
Theta method [146] as<br />
Θ = ∆Tm<br />
Tspan<br />
(4.36)<br />
where ∆Tm is the mean temperature difference and Tspan is the maximum temperature<br />
difference (Thi−Tci) (see Fig. 4.5). The Theta method is related is related to the associated<br />
ε and NT U methods by expressions<br />
Θ = ∆Tm<br />
Tspan<br />
= ε<br />
NT U<br />
(4.37)<br />
The relationship between parameters are often presented in graphical form as shown in<br />
Fig.4.6. However, they all depend on finding ∆Tm or ∆Tlm<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
4.4 The Theta Method 65<br />
Figure 4.6. θ correction charts for mean temperature difference: (a) One shell pass and any<br />
multiple of two tube passes. (b) Two shell passes and any multiple of four tube passes.[121].<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
66 5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
5.1 <strong>Design</strong> Consideration<br />
5.1.1 Fluid Stream Allocations<br />
There are a number of practical guidelines which can lead to the optimum design of a<br />
given heat exchanger. Remembering that the primary duty is to perform its thermal duty<br />
with the lowest cost yet provide excellent in service reliability, the selection of fluid stream<br />
allocations should be of primary concern to the designer. There are many trade-offs in<br />
fluid allocation in heat transfer coefficients, available pressure drop, fouling tendencies<br />
and operating pressure.<br />
• The higher pressure fluid normally flows through the tube side. With their small<br />
diameter and nominal wall thicknesses, they are easily able to accept high pressures<br />
and avoids more expensive, larger diameter components to be designed for high<br />
pressure. If it is necessary to put the higher pressure stream in the shell, it should<br />
be placed in a smaller diameter and longer shell.<br />
• Place corrosive fluids in the tubes, other items being equal. Corrosion is resisted<br />
by using special alloys and it is much less expensive than using special alloy shell<br />
materials. Other tube side materials can be clad with corrosion resistant materials<br />
or epoxy coated.<br />
• Flow the higher fouling fluids through the tubes. Tubes are easier to clean using<br />
common mechanical methods.<br />
• Because of the wide variety of designs and configurations available for the shell<br />
circuits, such as tube pitch, baffle use and spacing, multiple nozzles, it is best to<br />
place fluids requiring low pressure drops in the shell circuit.<br />
• The fluid with the lower heat transfer coefficient normally goes in the shell circuit.<br />
This allows the use of low-fin tubing to offset the low transfer rate by providing<br />
increased available surface.<br />
Quiz: The top product of a distillation column is condensed using sea water. Allocate<br />
the fluids in the tube and the shell of the heat exchanger?.<br />
5.1.2 Shell and tube velocity<br />
High velocities will give high heat transfer coefficients but also a high pressure drop and<br />
cause erosion. The velocity must be high enough to prevent any suspended solids settling,<br />
but not so high as to cause corrosion. High velocities will reduce fouling. Plastic inserts<br />
are sometimes used to reduce erosion at the tube inlet. Typical design velocity are given<br />
below:<br />
Liquids<br />
1. Tube-side process fluids:1 to 2 m/s, maximum 4 m/s if required to reduce fouling:<br />
water 1.5 to 2.5 m/s<br />
2. Shell side: 0.3 to 1/m/s<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
5.1 <strong>Design</strong> Consideration 67<br />
Vapors<br />
For vapors, the velocity used will depend on the operating pressure and fluid density; the<br />
lower values in the range given below will apply to molecular weight materials<br />
Vacuum 50 to 70 m/s<br />
Atmospheric pressure 10 to 30 m/s<br />
High pressure 5 to 10 m/s<br />
5.1.3 Stream temperature<br />
The closer the temperature approach used (the difference between the outlet temperature<br />
of one stream and the inlet temperature of the other stream) the larger will be the heat<br />
transfer area required for a given duty. The optimum value will depend on the application<br />
and can only be determined by making an economic analysis of alternative designs. As<br />
a general guide the greater temperature difference should be at least 20 o C. and the<br />
least temperature difference 5 to 7 o C for cooler using cooling water and 3 to 5 o C using<br />
refrigerated brine. The maximum temperature rise in recirculated cooling water is limited<br />
to around 30 o C. Care should be taken to ensure that cooling media temperatures are kept<br />
well above the freezing point of the process materials. When heat exchange is between<br />
process fluids for heat recovery the optimum approach temperatures will normally not be<br />
lower than 20 o C.<br />
5.1.4 Pressure drop<br />
The value suggested below can be used as a general guide and will normally give designs<br />
that are near the optimum.<br />
Liquids<br />
Viscosity
68 5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
two value. Alternatively, the method suggested by Frank (1978) can be used; in which<br />
Q = A [U2(T1 − t2) − U2(T2 − t1)]<br />
ln (5.1)<br />
U2(T1−t2)<br />
U1(T2−t1)<br />
where U1, U2 are evaluated at the end of the exchanger.<br />
If the variation is too large for these simple methods to be used it will be necessary<br />
to divide the temperature-enthalpy profile into sections and evaluate the heat transfer<br />
coefficients and area required for each section.<br />
5.2 <strong>Design</strong> data<br />
Before discussing actual thermal design, let us look at the data that must be furnished<br />
by the process licensor before design can begin:<br />
1. flow rates of both streams.<br />
2. inlet and outlet temperatures of both streams.<br />
3. operating pressure of both streams. This is required for gases, especially if the gas<br />
density is not furnished; it is not really necessary for liquids, as their properties do<br />
not vary with pressure.<br />
4. allowable pressure drop for both streams. This is a very important parameter for<br />
heat exchanger design. Generally, for liquids, a value of 0.5-0.7 kg/cm 2 is permitted<br />
per shell. A higher pressure drop is usually warranted for viscous liquids, especially<br />
in the tubeside. For gases, the allowed value is generally 0.05-0.2 kg/cm 2 , with 0.1<br />
kg/cm 2 being typical.<br />
5. fouling resistance for both streams. If this is not furnished, the designer should<br />
adopt values specified in the TEMA standards or based on past experience.<br />
6. physical properties of both streams. These include viscosity, thermal conductivity,<br />
density, and specific heat, preferably at both inlet and outlet temperatures. Viscosity<br />
data must be supplied at inlet and outlet temperatures, especially for liquids,<br />
since the variation with temperature may be considerable and is irregular (neither<br />
linear nor log-log).<br />
7. heat duty. The duty specified should be consistent for both the shellside and the<br />
tubeside.<br />
8. type of heat exchanger. If not furnished, the designer can choose this based upon<br />
the characteristics of the various types of construction described earlier. In fact, the<br />
designer is normally in a better position than the process engineer to do this.<br />
9. line sizes. It is desirable to match nozzle sizes with line sizes to avoid expanders<br />
or reducers. However, sizing criteria for nozzles are usually more stringent than for<br />
lines, especially for the shellside inlet. Consequently, nozzle sizes must sometimes be<br />
one size (or even more in exceptional circumstances) larger than the corresponding<br />
line sizes, especially for small lines.<br />
10. preferred tube size. Tube size is designated as O.D., thickness, length. Some plant<br />
owners have a preferred O.D., thickness (usually based upon inventory considerations),<br />
and the available plot area will determine the maximum tube length. Many<br />
plant owners prefer to standardize all three dimensions, again based upon inventory<br />
considerations.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
5.3 Tubeside design 69<br />
11. maximum shell diameter. This is based upon tube-bundle removal requirements<br />
and is limited by crane capacities. Such limitations apply only to exchangers with<br />
removable tube bundles, namely U-tube and floating-head. For fixed-tubesheet<br />
exchangers, the only limitation is the manufa’s fabrication capability and the availability<br />
of components such as dished ends and flanges. Thus, floating-head heat<br />
exchangers are often limited to a shell I.D. of 1.4-1.5 m and a tube length of 6 m<br />
or 9 m, whereas fixedtubesheet heat exchangers can have shells as large as 3 m and<br />
tubes lengths up to 12 m or more.<br />
12. materials of construction. If the tubes and shell are made of identical materials, all<br />
components should be of this material. Thus, only the shell and tube materials of<br />
construction need to be specified. However, if the shell and tubes are of different<br />
metallurgy, the materials of all principal components should be specified to avoid<br />
any ambiguity. The principal components are shell (and shell cover), tubes, channel<br />
(and channel cover), tubesheets, and baffles. Tubesheets may be lined or clad.<br />
13. special considerations. These include cycling, upset conditions, alternative operating<br />
scenarios, and whether operation is continuous or intermittent.<br />
5.3 Tubeside design<br />
Tubeside calculations are quite straightforward, since tubeside flow represents a simple<br />
case of flow through a circular conduit. <strong>Heat</strong>-transfer coefficient and pressure drop both<br />
vary with tubeside velocity, the latter more strongly so. A good design will make the best<br />
use of the allowable pressure drop, as this will yield the highest heat-transfer coefficient.<br />
If all the tubeside fluid were to flow through all the tubes (one tube pass), it would lead<br />
to a certain velocity. Usually, this velocity is unacceptably low and therefore has to be<br />
increased. By incorporating pass partition plates (with appropriate gasketing) in the<br />
channels, the tubeside fluid is made to flow several times through a fraction of the total<br />
number of tubes. Thus, in a heat exchanger with 200 tubes and two passes, the fluid flows<br />
through 100 tubes at a time, and the velocity will be twice what it would be if there were<br />
only one pass. The number of tube passes is usually one, two, four, six, eight, and so on.<br />
5.3.1 <strong>Heat</strong>-transfer coefficient<br />
The tubeside heat-transfer coefficient is a function of the Reynolds number, the Prandtl<br />
number, and the tube diameter. These can be broken down into the following fundamental<br />
parameters: physical properties (namely viscosity, thermal conductivity, and specific<br />
heat); tube diameter; and, very importantly, mass velocity.<br />
The variation in liquid viscosity is quite considerable; so, this physical property has the<br />
most dramatic effect on heat-transfer coefficient. The fundamental equation for turbulent<br />
heat-transfer inside tubes is:<br />
or<br />
Nu = CRe a P r b<br />
h = C k<br />
D<br />
GD<br />
µ<br />
µ<br />
a Cpµ<br />
k<br />
µw<br />
c<br />
b µ<br />
, (5.2)<br />
µw<br />
c<br />
(5.3)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
70 5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
where<br />
Nu = hde<br />
P r =<br />
k Nusselt number<br />
Cpµ<br />
Re<br />
de<br />
A<br />
k<br />
ρud<br />
µ<br />
4A<br />
P<br />
Prandtl number<br />
Reynolds number<br />
hydraulic diameter<br />
cross-sectional area<br />
P wetted perimeter<br />
u fluid velocity<br />
µw fluid viscosity at the tube wall temperature<br />
k fluid thermal conductivity<br />
fluid specific heat<br />
Cp<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
C =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
0.021 gases<br />
0.023 non-viscous liquid<br />
0.027 viscous liquid<br />
a = 0.8<br />
b = 0.3 for cooling<br />
b = 0.4 for heating<br />
c = 0.14<br />
Viscosity influences the heat-transfer coefficient in two opposing ways- as a parameter of<br />
the Reynolds number, and as a parameter of Prandtl number. Thus, from Eq. 5.3:<br />
h ∝ µ 0.8−0.33 = µ 0.47<br />
(5.4)<br />
In other words, the heat-transfer coefficient is inversely proportional to viscosity to the<br />
0.47 power. Similarly, the heat-transfer coefficient is directly proportional to thermal<br />
conductivity to the 0.67 power.<br />
These two facts lead to some interesting generalities about heat transfer. A high thermal<br />
conductivity promotes a high heat-transfer coefficient. Thus, cooling water (thermal<br />
conductivity of around 0.55 kcal/hm ◦ C) has an extremely high heat-transfer coefficient<br />
of typically 6,000 kcal/hm 2◦ C, followed by hydrocarbon liquids (thermal conductivity<br />
between 0.08 and 0.12 kcal/hm ◦ C) at 250-1,300 kcal/hm 2◦ C, and then hydrocarbon gases<br />
(thermal conductivity between 0.02 and 0.03 kcal/hm ◦ C) at 50-500 kcal/hm 2◦ C.<br />
Hydrogen is an unusual gas, because it has an exceptionally high thermal conductivity<br />
(greater than that of hydrocarbon liquids). Thus, its heat-transfer coefficient is toward<br />
the upper limit of the range for hydrocarbon liquids.<br />
The range of heat-transfer coefficients for hydrocarbon liquids is rather large due to the<br />
large variation in their viscosity, from less than 0.1 cP for ethylene and propylene to more<br />
than 1,000 cP or more for bitumen. The large variation in the heat-transfer coefficients<br />
of hydrocarbon gases is attributable to the large variation in operating pressure. As<br />
operating pressure rises, gas density increases. Pressure drop is directly proportional to<br />
the square of mass velocity and inversely proportional to density. Therefore, for the same<br />
pressure drop, a higher mass velocity can be maintained when the density is higher. This<br />
larger mass velocity translates into a higher heat-transfer coefficient.<br />
5.3.2 Pressure drop<br />
The pressure drop due to friction exists because of the shear stress between the fluid and<br />
the tube wall. Estimation of the friction pressure drop is somewhat more complex and<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
5.3 Tubeside design 71<br />
various approaches have been taken, for example the frictional pressure gradient is given<br />
as<br />
<br />
dp<br />
−<br />
dz f<br />
= 4τo 4fG2<br />
= ,<br />
d 2dρ<br />
(5.5)<br />
where G is the mass flux in kg/m2s and f is the friction factor calculated using a Blasiustype<br />
model as<br />
⎧<br />
0.3164<br />
⎪⎨ Re<br />
f =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
0.25 Re ≥ 2320<br />
64 Re < 2320 .<br />
Re<br />
Integration of equation B.1 yields<br />
∆p = 4fG2<br />
2ρ<br />
L<br />
d<br />
, (5.6)<br />
Mass velocity strongly influences the heat-transfer coefficient. For turbulent flow, the<br />
tubeside heat-transfer coefficient varies to the 0.8 power of tubeside mass velocity, whereas<br />
tubeside pressure drop varies to the square of mass velocity. Thus, with increasing mass<br />
velocity, pressure drop increases more rapidly than does the heat-transfer coefficient.<br />
Consequently, there will be an optimum mass velocity above which it will be wasteful to<br />
increase mass velocity further.<br />
Furthermore, very high velocities lead to erosion. However, the pressure drop limitation<br />
usually becomes controlling long before erosive velocities are attained. The minimum<br />
recommended liquid velocity inside tubes is 1.0 m/s, while the maximum is 2.5-3.0 m/s.<br />
Pressure drop is proportional to the square of velocity and the total length of travel.<br />
Thus, when the number of tube passes is increased for a given number of tubes and a<br />
given tubeside flow rate, the pressure drop rises to the cube of this increase. In actual<br />
practice, the rise is somewhat less because of lower friction factors at higher Reynolds<br />
numbers, so the exponent should be approximately 2.8 instead of 3.<br />
Tubeside pressure drop rises steeply with an increase in the number of tube passes. Consequently,<br />
it often happens that for a given number of tubes and two passes, the pressure<br />
drop is much lower than the allowable value, but with four passes it exceeds the allowable<br />
pressure drop. If in such circumstances a standard tube has to be employed, the designer<br />
may be forced to accept a rather low velocity. However, if the tube diameter and length<br />
may be varied, the allowable pressure drop can be better utilized and a higher tubeside<br />
velocity realized.<br />
The following tube diameters are usually used in the CPI: (1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 5/8, 3/4, 1, 1<br />
1/4, 1 1/2 in. Of these, 3/4 in. and 1 in. are the most popular. Tubes smaller than 3/4<br />
in. O.D. should not be used for fouling services. The use of small-diameter tubes, such as<br />
1 in., is warranted only for small heat exchangers with heat-transfer areas less than 20-30<br />
m 2 .<br />
It is important to realize that the total pressure drop for a given stream must be met.<br />
The distribution of pressure drop in the various heat exchangers for a given stream in a<br />
particular circuit may be varied to obtain good heat transfer in all the heat exchangers.<br />
Consider a hot liquid stream flowing through several preheat exchangers. Normally, a<br />
pressure drop of 0.7 kg/cm 2 per shell is permitted for liquid streams. If there are five<br />
such preheat exchangers, a total pressure drop of 3.5 kg/cm 2 for the circuit would be<br />
permitted. If the pressure drop through two of these exchangers turns out to be only 0.8<br />
kg/cm 2 , the balance of 2.7 kg/cm 2 would be available for the other three.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
72 5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
5.4 Shell side design<br />
Shell side design The shellside calculations are far more complex than those for the tubeside.<br />
This is mainly because on the shellside there is not just one flow stream but one<br />
principal cross-flow stream and four leakage or bypass streams. There are various shellside<br />
flow arrangements, as well as various tube layout patterns and baffling designs, which<br />
together determine the shellside stream analysis.<br />
5.4.1 Shell configuration<br />
TEMA defines various shell patterns based on the flow of the shellside fluid through the<br />
shell: E, F, G, H, J, K, and X (see Figure 3.1).<br />
In a TEMA E single-pass shell, the shellside fluid enters the shell at one end and leaves<br />
from the other end. This is the most common shell type - more heat exchangers are built<br />
to this configuration than all other con- figurations combined.<br />
A TEMA F two-pass shell has a longitudinal baffle that divides the shell into two passes.<br />
The shellside fluid enters at one end, traverses the entire length of the exchanger through<br />
one-half the shell cross-sectional area, turns around and flows through the second pass,<br />
then finally leaves at the end of the second pass. The longitudinal baffle stops well short<br />
of the tubesheet, so that the fluid can flow into the second pass.<br />
The F shell is used for temperature- cross situations - that is, where the cold stream leaves<br />
at a temperature higher than the outlet temperature of the hot stream. If a two-pass (F)<br />
shell has only two tube passes, this becomes a true countercurrent arrangement where a<br />
large temperature cross can be achieved.<br />
A TEMA J shell is a divided-flow shell wherein the shellside fluid enters the shell at the<br />
center and divides into two halves, one flowing to the left and the other to the right and<br />
leaving separately. They are then combined into a single stream. This is identified as a<br />
J 1-2 shell. Alternatively, the stream may be split into two halves that enter the shell at<br />
the two ends, flow toward the center, and leave as a single stream, which is identified as<br />
a J 2-1 shell.<br />
A TEMA G shell is a split-flow shell (see Figure 3.1). This construction is usually employed<br />
for horizontal thermosyphon reboilers. There is only a central support plate and<br />
no baffles. A G shell cannot be used for heat exchangers with tube lengths greater than<br />
3 m, since this would exceed the limit on maximum unsupported tube length specified by<br />
TEMA - typically 1.5 m, though it varies with tube O.D., thickness, and material.<br />
When a larger tube length is needed, a TEMA H shell (see Figure3.1) is used. An H shell<br />
is basically two G shells placed side-by-side, so that there are two full support plates. This<br />
is described as a double-split configuration, as the flow is split twice and recombined twice.<br />
This construction, too, is invariably employed for horizontal thermosyphon reboilers. The<br />
advantage of G and H shells is that the pressure drop is drastically less and there are no<br />
cross baffles.<br />
A TEMA X shell (see Figure 3.1) is a pure cross-flow shell where the shellside fluid enters<br />
at the top (or bottom) of the shell, flows across the tubes, and exits from the opposite side<br />
of the shell. The flow may be introduced through multiple nozzles located strategically<br />
along the length of the shell in order to achieve a better distribution. The pressure drop<br />
will be extremely low - in fact, there is hardly any pressure drop in the shell, and what<br />
pressure drop there is, is virtually all in the nozzles. Thus, this configuration is employed<br />
for cooling or condensing vapors at low pressure, particularly vacuum. Full support plates<br />
can be located if needed for structural integrity; they do not interfere with the shellside<br />
flow because they are parallel to the flow direction.<br />
A TEMA K shell (see Figure 3.1) is a special cross-flow shell employed for kettle reboilers<br />
(thus the K). It has an integral vapor-disengagement space embodied in an enlarged shell.<br />
Here, too, full support plates can be employed as required.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
5.4 Shell side design 73<br />
5.4.2 Tube layout patterns<br />
There are four tube layout patterns, as shown in Figure 5.1: triangular (30 ◦ ), rotated<br />
triangular (60 ◦ ), square (90 ◦ ), and rotated square (45 ◦ ).<br />
Figure 5.1. Tubes layout pattern.<br />
A triangular (or rotated triangular) pattern will accommodate more tubes than a square<br />
(or rotated square) pattern. Furthermore, a triangular pattern produces high turbulence<br />
and therefore a high heat-transfer coefficient. However, at the typical tube pitch of 1.25<br />
times the tube O.D., it does not permit mechanical cleaning of tubes, since access lanes<br />
are not available. Consequently, a triangular layout is limited to clean shellside services.<br />
For services that require mechanical cleaning on the shellside, square patterns must be<br />
used. Chemical cleaning does not require access lanes, so a triangular layout may be used<br />
for dirty shellside services provided chemical cleaning is suitable and effective.<br />
A rotated triangular pattern seldom offers any advantages over a triangular pattern, and<br />
its use is consequently not very popular.<br />
For dirty shellside services, a square layout is typically employed. However, since this is an<br />
in-line pattern, it produces lower turbulence. Thus, when the shellside Reynolds number<br />
is low (< 2,000), it is usually advantageous to employ a rotated square pattern because<br />
this produces much higher turbulence, which results in a higher efficiency of conversion<br />
of pressure drop to heat transfer.<br />
As noted earlier, fixed-tubesheet construction is usually employed for clean services on<br />
the shellside, Utube construction for clean services on the tubeside, and floating-head<br />
construction for dirty services on both the shellside and tubeside. (For clean services<br />
on both shellside and tubeside, either fixed-tubesheet or U-tube construction may be<br />
used, although U-tube is preferable since it permits differential expansion between the<br />
shell and the tubes.) Hence, a triangular tube pattern may be used for fixed-tubesheet<br />
exchangers and a square (or rotated square) pattern for floating-head exchangers. For<br />
U-tube exchangers, a triangular pattern may be used provided the shellside stream is<br />
clean and a square (or rotated square) pattern if it is dirty.<br />
5.4.3 Tube pitch<br />
Tube pitch is defined as the shortest distance between two adjacent tubes.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
74 5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
For a triangular pattern, TEMA specifies a minimum tube pitch of 1.25 times the tube<br />
O.D. Thus, a 25- mm tube pitch is usually employed for 20-mm O.D. tubes.<br />
For square patterns, TEMA additionally recommends a minimum cleaning lane of 4 in.<br />
(or 6 mm) between adjacent tubes. Thus, the minimum tube pitch for square patterns<br />
is either 1.25 times the tube O.D. or the tube O.D. plus 6 mm, whichever is larger. For<br />
example, 20-mm tubes should be laid on a 26-mm (20 mm + 6 mm) square pitch, but<br />
25-mm tubes should be laid on a 31.25-mm (25 mm ´ 1.25) square pitch.<br />
<strong>Design</strong>ers prefer to employ the minimum recommended tube pitch, because it leads to<br />
the smallest shell diameter for a given number of tubes. However, in exceptional circumstances,<br />
the tube pitch may be increased to a higher value, for example, to reduce<br />
shellside pressure drop. This is particularly true in the case of a cross-flow shell.<br />
5.4.4 Baffling<br />
Type of baffles. Baffles are used to support tubes, enable a desirable velocity to be<br />
maintained for the shellside fluid, and prevent failure of tubes due to flow-induced vibration.<br />
There are two types of baffles: plate and rod. Plate baffles may be single-segmental,<br />
double-segmental, or triple-segmental, as shown in Figure 5.2.<br />
Figure 5.2. Types of baffles.<br />
Baffle spacing. Baffle spacing is the centerline-to-centerline distance between adjacent<br />
baffles. It is the most vital parameter in STHE design.<br />
The TEMA standards specify the minimum baffle spacing as one-fifth of the shell inside<br />
diameter or 2 in., whichever is greater. Closer spacing will result in poor bundle penetration<br />
by the shellside fluid and difficulty in mechanically cleaning the outsides of the<br />
tubes. Furthermore, a low baffle spacing results in a poor stream distribution as will be<br />
explained later.<br />
The maximum baffle spacing is the shell inside diameter. Higher baf- fle spacing will<br />
lead to predominantly longitudinal flow, which is less efficient than cross-flow, and large<br />
unsupported tube spans, which will make the exchanger prone to tube failure due to<br />
flow-induced vibration.<br />
Optimum baffle spacing. For turbulent flow on the shellside (Re > 1,000), the heattransfer<br />
coefficient varies to the 0.6-0.7 power of velocity; however, pressure drop varies<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
5.4 Shell side design 75<br />
to the 1.7-2.0 power. For laminar flow (Re < 100), the exponents are 0.33 for the heattransfer<br />
coefficient and 1.0 for pressure drop. Thus, as baffle spacing is reduced, pressure<br />
drop increases at a much faster rate than does the heat-transfer coefficient.<br />
This means that there will be an optimum ratio of baffle spacing to shell inside diameter<br />
that will result in the highest efficiency of conversion of pressure drop to heat transfer.<br />
This optimum ratio is normally between 0.3 and 0.6.<br />
Baffle cut. As shown in Figure 5.3, baffle cut is the height of the segment that is cut in<br />
each baffle to permit the shellside fluid to flow across the baffle. This is expressed as a<br />
percentage of the shell inside diameter. Although this, too, is an important parameter<br />
for STHE design, its effect is less profound than that of baffle spacing.<br />
Figure 5.3. Baffle cut.<br />
Baffle cut can vary between 15% and 45% of the shell inside diameter.<br />
Both very small and very large baffle cuts are detrimental to efficient heat transfer on the<br />
shellside due to large deviation from an ideal situation, as illustrated in Figure 5.4.<br />
Figure 5.4. Effect of small and large baffle cuts.<br />
It is strongly recommended that only baffle cuts between 20% and 35% be employed. Reducing<br />
baffle cut below 20% to increase the shellside heat-transfer coefficient or increasing<br />
the baffle cut beyond 35% to decrease the shellside pressure drop usually lead to poor designs.<br />
Other aspects of tube bundle geometry should be changed instead to achieve those<br />
goals. For example, doublesegmental baffles or a divided-flow shell, or even a cross-flow<br />
shell, may be used to reduce the shellside pressure drop.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
76 5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
For single-phase fluids on the shellside, a horizontal baffle cut (Figure 5.5) is recommended,<br />
because this minimizes accumulation of deposits at the bottom of the shell and also<br />
prevents stratification. However, in the case of a two-pass shell (TEMA F), a vertical cut<br />
is preferred for ease of fabrication and bundle assembly.<br />
Figure 5.5. Baffle cut orientation<br />
5.4.5 Equalize cross-flow and window velocities<br />
Flow across tubes is referred to as cross-flow, whereas flow through the window area (that<br />
is, through the baffle cut area) is referred to as window flow.<br />
The window velocity and the cross-flow velocity should be as close as possible - preferably<br />
within 20%<br />
of each other. If they differ by more than that, repeated acceleration and deceleration take<br />
place along the length of the tube bundle, resulting in inefficient conversion of pressure<br />
drop to heat transfer.<br />
5.4.6 Shellside stream analysis (Flow pattern)<br />
On the shellside, there is not just one stream, but a main cross-flow stream and four<br />
leakage or bypass streams, as illustrated in Figure 5.6. Tinker (4) proposed calling these<br />
streams the main cross-flow stream (B), a tube-to-baffle-hole leakage stream (A), a bundle<br />
bypass stream (C), a pass-partition bypass stream (F), and a baffle-to-shell leakage stream<br />
(E). While the B (main cross-flow) stream is highly effective for heat transfer, the other<br />
streams are not as effective. The A stream is fairly efficient, because the shellside fluid<br />
is in contact with the tubes. Similarly, the C stream is in contact with the peripheral<br />
tubes around the bundle, and the F stream is in contact with the tubes along the passpartition<br />
lanes. Consequently, these streams also experience heat transfer, although at<br />
a lower efficiency than the B stream. However, since the E stream flows along the shell<br />
wall, where there are no tubes, it encounters no heat transfer at all.<br />
The fractions of the total flow represented by these five streams can be determined for a<br />
particular set of exchanger geometry and shellside flow conditions by any sophisticated<br />
heatexchanger thermal design software. Essentially, the five streams are in parallel and<br />
flow along paths of varying hydraulic resistances. Thus, the flow fractions will be such that<br />
the pressure drop of each stream is identical, since all the streams begin and end at the<br />
inlet and outlet nozzles. Subsequently, based upon the efficiency of each of these streams,<br />
the overall shellside stream efficiency and thus the shellside heat-transfer coefficient is<br />
established.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
5.4 Shell side design 77<br />
Figure 5.6. Tube arrangement<br />
Since the flow fractions depend strongly upon the path resistances, varying any of the<br />
following construction parameters will affect stream analysis and thereby the shellside<br />
performance of an exchanger:<br />
• baffle spacing and baffle cut;<br />
• tube layout angle and tube pitch;<br />
• number of lanes in the flow direction and lane width;<br />
• clearance between the tube and the baffle hole;<br />
• clearance between the shell I.D. and the baffle; and<br />
• location of sealing strips and sealing rods.<br />
Using a very low baffle spacing tends to increase the leakage and bypass streams. This<br />
is because all five shellside streams are in parallel and, therefore, have the same pressure<br />
drop. The leakage path dimensions are fixed. Consequently, when baffle spacing is decreased,<br />
the resistance of the main cross-flow path and thereby its pressure drop increases.<br />
Since the pressure drops of all five streams must be equal, the leakage and bypass streams<br />
increase until the pressure drops of all the streams balance out. The net result is a rise<br />
in the pressure drop without a corresponding increase in the heat-transfer coefficient.<br />
The shellside fluid viscosity also affects stream analysis profoundly. In addition to influencing<br />
the shellside heat transfer and pressure drop performance, the stream analysis also<br />
affects the mean temperature difference (MTD) of the exchanger. This will be discussed<br />
in detail later. First, though, let’s look at an example that demonstrates how to optimize<br />
baffle design when there is no significant temperature profile distortion.<br />
5.4.7 <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient and pressure drop<br />
For the shell side heat transfer coefficient and pressure drop there are a number of methods<br />
these include:<br />
• Kern’s method<br />
• Donohue’s method<br />
• Bell-Delaware method<br />
• Tinker’s method<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
78 5 Thermal <strong>Design</strong><br />
Besides these methods there is some proprietary methods putout by various organization<br />
for use by their member companies. A number of these method are based on one of the<br />
above methods. Some are based upon a judicious combination of methods 3 and 4 above<br />
and supplemented by further research data. Among the most popular of the proprietary<br />
methods, judged by their large clientele are<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Research Inc. (HTRI), Alliambra, california. This method is also<br />
known as stream analysis method.<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer and Fluid Flow Service (HTFS), Engineering Science Division, AERE,<br />
Harwell, United Kingdom Method.<br />
In this work only Kern’s method is given below. Bell-Delaware method may be found in<br />
Coulson and Richardson’s<br />
5.4.8 <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
where<br />
Nu = 0.36Re 0.55 P r 1/3<br />
µ<br />
µw<br />
0.14<br />
, (5.7)<br />
Nu = hde<br />
P r =<br />
k Nusselt number<br />
Cpµ<br />
Re =<br />
k Prandtl number<br />
Gde<br />
de =<br />
µ Reynolds number<br />
4A<br />
A =<br />
P hydraulic diameter<br />
cross-sectional flow area<br />
P = wetted perimeter<br />
G =<br />
As =<br />
M<br />
As<br />
Mass flux<br />
(pt−do)DslB<br />
pt<br />
fluid viscosity at the tube wall temperature<br />
pt = pitch diameter<br />
Ds = shell diameter<br />
lB = Baffle spacing<br />
Hydraulic diameter (Fig. 5.1)<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
de =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
5.4.9 Pressure drop<br />
where<br />
L=tube length<br />
p 2 t −πd2 o /4<br />
πdo<br />
0.87p 2 t /2−πd2 o/8<br />
πdo/2<br />
∆p = 4f<br />
for square pitch<br />
for equilateral triangular pitch<br />
<br />
Ds<br />
d<br />
ρu2 L <br />
2 lb<br />
−0.14 µ<br />
µw<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
f =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
0.3164<br />
Re0.25 Re ≥ 2320<br />
64 Re < 2320 .<br />
Re<br />
, (5.8)<br />
lB = baffle spacing. The term (L/lB) is the number of times the flow crosses the tube<br />
bundle=(NB + 1). Where NB is the number of baffles.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
5.5 <strong>Design</strong> Algorithm 79<br />
5.5 <strong>Design</strong> Algorithm<br />
Step1<br />
Specification<br />
Define duty Q<br />
Make energy balance if needed<br />
to calcualted unspecified flow<br />
rates or temperature<br />
Q=M cc pc(Tc2-T c1)=MhC ph(Th1-Th2) Step2<br />
Calculate physical properties<br />
Step3<br />
Assume value of overall<br />
coefficient U o,ass<br />
Step 4<br />
Decide number of shell and<br />
tube passes<br />
Calculate ΔT , F and ΔT<br />
lm m<br />
Step 5<br />
Determine heat transfer area<br />
required Ao=q/Uo,assΔTm Step 6<br />
Decide type, tube size, material,<br />
layout<br />
Assign fluids to shell or tube<br />
Step 7<br />
Calculate number of tubes<br />
Step 8<br />
Calculate shell diameter<br />
Set U o,ass =U o,cal<br />
No<br />
No<br />
Yes<br />
Step 9<br />
Estimate tube-side heat<br />
transfer coefficient<br />
Step 10<br />
Decide baffle spacing and estimate<br />
shell side heat transfer coefficient<br />
Step 11<br />
Calculate overall heat transfer<br />
Coefficient including fouling factors<br />
U o,cal<br />
0
80 6 Specification sheet<br />
6 Specification sheet<br />
Specification sheet is a data sheet that contains the information provided by the customer<br />
to the vendor for the process and mechanical designs of an exchanger. After the process<br />
design is done, the engineer fills in some further information. The rest of the information<br />
is filled after the mechanical design is completed. The specification sheet is a medium of<br />
communication between different parties involved in the procurement, design and fabrication<br />
of heat exchanger. It is also used to compare the performance of the installed unit<br />
with the design conditions.<br />
6.1 Information included<br />
The information contained in the sheet is best decribed by a data sheet. Although each<br />
company has its own version of data sheet, the most popular one is that of the TEMA<br />
standards. It is similar to that of API standard 660. It contains the fluid<br />
• flow rate and properties,<br />
• heat duty,<br />
• heat transfer coefficient,<br />
• fouling resistance,<br />
• details about the shell and tube size,<br />
• materials,<br />
• baffle nozzle, etc..<br />
Some variations include information for alternate designs and different systems of units<br />
(British, SI, metric).<br />
6.2 Information not included<br />
The regarding the type of flanges, studs, vent and relief valves, drains lines, welding,<br />
inspection and testing requirement of the material of construction, etc.. are not given in<br />
the specification sheet.<br />
6.3 <strong>Operation</strong> conditions<br />
The following operating conditions regarding the exchanger operation should be known<br />
to the thermal designer for critical application.<br />
1. Start-up condition and procedure<br />
2. Normal operating conditions<br />
3. Upset and emergency conditions<br />
4. shut down conditions and procedure<br />
5. possibility of switching the shell-side and tube tube side fluid for better design<br />
6. possibility of increasing the allowable pressure drop to control the fouling<br />
7. beside these the spec-sheet should provided with other information concerning the<br />
composition of the streams, their thermal and physical properties and any phase<br />
change occurring.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
6.4 Bid evaluation 81<br />
6.4 Bid evaluation<br />
6.4.1 Factor to be consider<br />
For ease in evaluations of the bids submitted by competitive bidders, all pertinent data<br />
from each bid should be put on a large data sheet. During evaluation the following factor<br />
should be kept in mid:<br />
1. The design submitted by the bidders should meet the heat transfer and pressure<br />
drop requirements. Set the upper and lower limit of pressure drop for each bid.<br />
2. if the designs offered by bidder vary, the spec-sheet provided to them should be<br />
checked to see if any anomalies exist<br />
3. Adequate vent, drainage and safety valve should be provided<br />
4. Units should not have hot spot or dead zones<br />
5. Information about vibration analysis must be checked<br />
6. for fouling on the shell side, the tube lay out should permit easy cleaning<br />
7. The fabrication shop should have a good reputation and certificate of inspection<br />
8. The material of construction should be available at the country of the bidder or<br />
their import should not pose any difficulty<br />
9. the delivery should be on schedule<br />
10. cost should be low, cost escalation should be included<br />
11. the payment, penalty, and guarantee clauses in the contact should be evenly balance<br />
and be unduly favorable to the bidder<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
82 6 Specification sheet<br />
Figure 6.1. Data sheet<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
7 Storage, Installation, <strong>Operation</strong> and Maintenance<br />
Proper storage, installation handling and correct start up emergency, and shutdown procedure<br />
are important for the successful working of a well designed and fabricated heat<br />
exchanger. regular cleaning, maintenance and repairs are necessary to ensure trouble free<br />
operation of the unit for its designed life span. These will be discussed in the following<br />
sections.<br />
NOTE: Before placing your equipment in operation, environment and service conditions<br />
should be checked for compatibility with materials of construction. Contact your nearest<br />
heat exchanger Standard representative if you are not sure what the actual materials of<br />
construction are.<br />
Successful performance of heat transfer equipment, length of service and freedom from<br />
operating difficulties are largely dependent upon:<br />
1. Proper thermal design.<br />
2. Proper physical design.<br />
3. Storage practice prior to installation.<br />
4. Manner of installation, including design of foundation and piping.<br />
5. The method of operation.<br />
6. The thoroughness and frequency of cleaning.<br />
7. The materials, workmanship, and tools used in maintenance and making repairs<br />
and replacements.<br />
Failure to perform properly may be due to one or more of the following:<br />
1. Exchanger being dirty.<br />
2. Failure to remove preservation materials after storage.<br />
3. Operating conditions being different than design conditions.<br />
4. Air or gas binding.<br />
5. Incorrect piping connections.<br />
6. Excessive clearances between internal parts due to corrosion.<br />
7. Improper application.<br />
7.1 Storage<br />
Standard heat exchangers are protected against the elements during shipment. If they<br />
cannot be installed and put into operation immediately upon receipt at the jobsite, certain<br />
precautions are necessary to prevent deterioration during storage. Responsibility for<br />
integrity of the heat exchangers must be assumed by the user. The manufacturer will not<br />
be responsible for damage, corrosion or other deterioration of heat exchanger equipment<br />
during transit and storage.<br />
Good storage practices are important, considering the high costs of repair or replacement,<br />
and the possible delays for items which require long lead times for manufacture. The<br />
following suggested practices are provided solely as a convenience to the user, who shall<br />
make his own decision on whether to use all or any of them.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
83
84 7 Storage, Installation, <strong>Operation</strong> and Maintenance<br />
1. On receipt of the heat exchanger, inspect for shipping damage to all protective covers.<br />
If damage is evident, inspect for possible contamination and replace protective<br />
covers as required. If damage is extensive, notify the carrier immediately.<br />
2. If the heat exchanger is not to be placed in immediate service, take precautions to<br />
prevent rusting or contamination.<br />
3. <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers for oil service, made of ferrous materials, may be pressure-tested<br />
with oil at the factory. However, the residual oil coating on the inside surfaces of<br />
the exchanger does not preclude the possibility of rust formation. Upon receipt,<br />
fill these exchangers with appropriate oil or coat them with a corrosion prevention<br />
compound for storage. These heat exchangers have a large warning decal, indicating<br />
that they should be protected with oil.<br />
4. The choice of preservation of interior surfaces during storage for other service applications<br />
depends upon your system requirements and economics. Only when included<br />
in the original purchase order specifications will specific preservation be incorporated<br />
prior to shipment from the factory.<br />
5. Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice or snow and wipe dry before moving<br />
exchangers into indoor storage. If unit was not filled with oil or other preservative,<br />
open drain plugs to remove any accumulated moisture, then reseal. Accumulation<br />
of moisture usually indicates rusting has already started and remedial action should<br />
be taken.<br />
6. Store under cover in a heated area, if possible. The ideal storage environment for<br />
heat exchangers and accessories is indoors, above grade, in a dry, low humidity atmosphere<br />
which is sealed to prevent entry of blowing dust, rain or snow. Maintain<br />
temperatures between 70 ◦ F and 105 ◦ F (wide temperature swings may cause condensation<br />
and ”sweating” of steel parts). Cover windows to prevent temperature<br />
variations caused by sunlight. Provide thermometers and humidity indicators at<br />
several points, and maintain atmosphere at 40% relative humidity or lower.<br />
7. In tropical climates, it may be necessary to use trays of renewable dessicant (such as<br />
silica gel), or portable dehumidifiers, to remove moisture from the air in the storage<br />
enclosure. Thermostatically controlled portable heaters (vented to outdoors) may<br />
be required to maintain even air temperatures inside the enclosure.<br />
8. Inspect heat exchangers and accessories frequently while they are in storage. Start<br />
a log to record results of inspections and maintenance performed while units are<br />
in storage. A typical log entry should include, for each component, at least the<br />
following:<br />
(a) Date<br />
(b) Inspector’s name<br />
(c) Identification of unit or item<br />
(d) Location<br />
(e) Condition of paint or coating<br />
(f) Condition of interior<br />
(g) Is free moisture present?<br />
(h) Has dirt accumulated?<br />
(i) Corrective steps taken<br />
9. To locate ruptured or corroded tubes or leaking joints between tubes and tubesheets,<br />
the following procedure is recommended:<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
7.2 Installation 85<br />
• Remove tube side channel covers or bonnets.<br />
• Pressurize the shell side of the exchanger with a cold fluid, preferably water.<br />
• Observe tube joints and tube ends for indication of test fluid leakage.<br />
10. With certain styles of exchangers, it will be necessary to buy or make a test ring to<br />
seal off the space between the floating tubesheet and inside shell diameter to apply<br />
the test in paragraph<br />
11. Consult your nearest sales representative for reference drawings showing installation<br />
of a test ring in your heat exchanger.<br />
12. To tighten a leaking tube joint, use a suitable parallel roller tube expander.<br />
• Do not roll tubes beyond the back face of the tubesheet. Maximum rolling<br />
depth should be tubesheet thickness minus 1/8”.<br />
• Do not re-roll tubes that are not leaking since this needlessly thins the tube<br />
wall.<br />
13. It is recommended that when a heat exchanger is dismantled, new gaskets be used<br />
in reassembly.<br />
• Composition gaskets become brittle and dried out in service and do not provide<br />
an effective seal when reused.<br />
• Metal or metal jacketed gaskets in initial compression match the contact surfaces<br />
and tend to work-harden and cannot be recompressed on reuse.<br />
14. Use of new bolting in conformance with dimension and ASTM specifications of the<br />
original design is recommended where frequent dismantling is encountered. CAU-<br />
TION: Do not remove channel covers, shell covers, floating head covers or bonnets<br />
until all pressure in the heat exchanger has been relieved and both shell side and<br />
tube side are completely drained.<br />
15. If paint deterioration begins, as evidenced by discoloration or light rusting, consider<br />
touch-up or repainting. If the unit is painted with our standard shop enamel, areas<br />
of light rust may be wire brushed and touched-up with any good quality air-drying<br />
synthetic enamel. Units painted with special paints (when specified on customers’<br />
orders) may require special techniques for touch-up or repair. Obtain specific information<br />
from the paint manufacturer. Painted steel units should never be permitted<br />
to rust or deteriorate to a point where their strength will be impaired. But a light<br />
surface rusting, on steel units which will be re-painted after installation, will not<br />
generally cause any harm. (See Items 3 and 4 for internal surface preservation.)<br />
16. If the internal preservation (Items 3 and 4 ) appears inadequate during storage,<br />
consider additional corrosion prevention measures and more frequent inspections.<br />
Interiors coated with rust preventive should be restored to good condition and recoated<br />
promptly if signs of rust occur.<br />
7.2 Installation<br />
7.2.1 Installation Planning<br />
1. On removable bundle heat exchangers, provide sufficient clearance at the stationary<br />
end to permit the removal of the tube bundle from the shell. On the floating head<br />
end, provide space to permit removal of the shell cover and floating head cover.<br />
2. On fixed bundle heat exchangers, provide sufficient clearance at one end to permit<br />
removal and replacement of tubes and at the other end provide sufficient clearance<br />
to permit tube rolling.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
86 7 Storage, Installation, <strong>Operation</strong> and Maintenance<br />
3. Provide valves and bypasses in the piping system so that both the shell side and<br />
tube side may be bypassed to permit isolation of the heat exchanger for inspection,<br />
cleaning and repairs.<br />
4. Provide convenient means for frequent cleaning as suggested under maintenance.<br />
5. Provide thermometer wells and pressure gauge pipe taps in all piping to and from<br />
the heat exchanger, located as close to the heat exchanger as possible.<br />
6. Provide necessary air vent valves for the heat exchanger so that it can be purged to<br />
prevent or relieve vapor or gas binding on both the tube side and shell side.<br />
7. Provide adequate supports for mounting the heat exchanger so that it will not settle<br />
and cause piping strains. Foundation bolts should be set accurately. In concrete<br />
footings, pipe sleeves at least one pipe size larger than the bolt diameter slipped over<br />
the bolt and cast in place are best for this purpose as they allow the bolt centers to<br />
be adjusted after the foundation has set.<br />
8. Install proper liquid level controls and relief valves and liquid level and temperature<br />
alarms, etc.<br />
9. Install gauge glasses or liquid level alarms in all vapor or gas spaces to indicate any<br />
failure occurring in the condensate drain system and to prevent flooding of the heat<br />
exchanger.<br />
10. Install a surge drum upstream from the heat exchanger to guard against pulsation<br />
of fluids caused by pumps, compressors or other equipment.<br />
11. Do not pipe drain connections to a common closed manifold; it makes it more<br />
difficult to determine that the exchanger has been thoroughly drained.<br />
7.2.2 Installation at Jobsite<br />
1. If you have maintained the heat exchanger in storage, thoroughly inspect it prior to<br />
installation. Make sure it is thoroughly cleaned to remove all preservation materials<br />
unless stored full of the same oil being used in the system, or the coating is soluble<br />
in the lubricating system oil. If the exchanger was oil-tested by any Standard and<br />
your purchase order did not specify otherwise, the oil used was Tectyl 754, a lightbodied<br />
oil which is soluble in most lubricating oils. Where special preservations were<br />
applied, you should consult the preservative manufacturer’s product information<br />
data for removal instructions.<br />
2. If the heat exchanger is not being stored, inspect for shipping damage to all protective<br />
covers upon receipt at the jobsite. If damage is evident, inspect for possible<br />
contamination and replace protective covers as required. If damage is extensive,<br />
notify the carrier immediately.<br />
3. When installing, set heat exchanger level and square so that pipe connections can<br />
be made without forcing.<br />
4. Before piping up, inspect all openings in the heat exchanger for foreign material.<br />
Remove all wooden plugs, bags of dessicant and shipping covers immediately prior to<br />
installing. Do not expose internal passages of the heat exchanger to the atmosphere<br />
since moisture or harmful contaminants may enter the unit and cause severe damage<br />
to the system due to freezing and/or corrosion.<br />
5. After piping is complete, if support cradles or feet are fixed to the heat exchanger,<br />
loosen foundation bolts at one end of the exchanger to allow free movement. Oversized<br />
holes in support cradles or feet are provided for this purpose.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
7.3 <strong>Operation</strong> 87<br />
6. If heat exchanger shell is equipped with a bellows-type expansion joint, remove<br />
shipping supports per instructions.<br />
7.3 <strong>Operation</strong><br />
1. Be sure entire system is clean before starting operation to prevent plugging of tubes<br />
or shell side passages with refuse. The use of strainers or settling tanks in pipelines<br />
leading to the heat exchanger is recommended.<br />
2. Open vent connections before starting up.<br />
3. Start operating gradually. See Table 1 for suggested start-up and shut-down procedures<br />
for most applications. If in doubt, consult the nearest manufactuerer representative<br />
for specific instructions.<br />
4. After the system is completely filled with the operating fluids and all air has been<br />
vented, close all manual vent connections.<br />
5. Re-tighten bolting on all gasketed or packed joints after the heat exchanger has<br />
reached operating temperatures to prevent leaks and gasket failures. Standard published<br />
torque values do not apply to packed end joints.<br />
6. Do not operate the heat exchanger under pressure and temperature conditions in<br />
excess of those specified on the nameplate.<br />
7. To guard against water hammer, drain condensate from steam heat exchangers and<br />
similar apparatus both when starting up and shutting down.<br />
8. Drain all fluids when shutting down to eliminate possible freezing and corroding.<br />
9. In all installations there should be no pulsation of fluids, since this causes vibration<br />
and will result in reduced operating life.<br />
10. Under no circumstances is the heat exchanger to be operated at a flowrate greater<br />
than that shown on the design specifications. Excessive flows can cause vibration<br />
and severely damage the heat exchanger tube bundle.<br />
11. <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers that are out of service for extended periods of time should be<br />
protected against corrosion as described in the storage requirements for new heat<br />
exchangers. <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers that are out of service for short periods and use water<br />
as the flowing medium should be thoroughly drained and blown dry with warm air,<br />
if possible. If this is not practical, the water should be circulated through the heat<br />
exchanger on a daily basis to prevent stagnant water conditions that can ultimately<br />
precipitate corrosion.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
88 7 Storage, Installation, <strong>Operation</strong> and Maintenance<br />
1. Clean exchangers subject to fouling (scale, sludge deposits, etc.) periodically, depending<br />
on specific conditions. A light sludge or scale coating on either side of the<br />
tube greatly reduces its effectiveness. A marked increase in pressure drop and/or<br />
reduction in performance usually indicates cleaning is necessary. Since the difficulty<br />
of cleaning increases rapidly as the scale thickens or deposits increase, the intervals<br />
between cleanings should not be excessive.<br />
2. Neglecting to keep tubes clean may result in random tube plugging. Consequent<br />
overheating or cooling of the plugged tubes, as compared to surrounding tubes, will<br />
cause physical damage and leaking tubes due to differential thermal expansion of<br />
the metals.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
7.3 <strong>Operation</strong> 89<br />
3. To clean or inspect the inside of the tubes, remove only the necessary tube side<br />
channel covers or bonnets, depending on type of exchanger construction.<br />
4. If the heat exchanger is equipped with sacrificial anodes or plates, replace these as<br />
required.<br />
5. To clean or inspect the outside of the tubes, it may be necessary to remove the tube<br />
bundle. (Fixed tubesheet exchanger bundles are non-removable).<br />
6. When removing tube bundles from heat exchangers for inspection or cleaning, exercise<br />
care to see that they are not damaged by improper handling.<br />
• The weight of the tube bundle should not be supported on individual tubes<br />
but should be carried by the tubesheets, support or baffle plates or on blocks<br />
contoured to the periphery of the tube bundles.<br />
• Do not handle tube bundles with hooks or other tools which might damage<br />
tubes. Move tube bundles on cradles or skids.<br />
• To withdraw tube bundles, pass rods through two or more of the tubes and<br />
take the load on the floating tubesheet.<br />
• Rods should be threaded at both ends, provided with nuts, and should pass<br />
through a steel bearing plate at each end of the bundle.<br />
• Insert a soft wood filler board between the bearing plate and tubesheet face to<br />
prevent damage to the tube ends.<br />
• Screw forged steel eyebolts into both bearing plates for pulling and lifting.<br />
• As an alternate to the rods, thread a steel cable through one tube and return<br />
through another tube.<br />
• A hardwood spreader block must be inserted between the cable and each<br />
tubesheet to prevent damage to the tube ends.<br />
7. If the heat exchanger has been in service for a considerable length of time without<br />
being removed, it may be necessary to use a jack on the floating tubesheet to break<br />
the bundle free.<br />
• Use a good-sized steel bearing plate with a filler board between the tubesheet<br />
face and bearing plate to protect the tube ends.<br />
8. Lift tube bundles horizontally by means of a cradle formed by bending a light-gauge<br />
plate or plates into a U-shape. Make attachments in the legs of the U for lifting.<br />
9. Do not drag bundles, since baffles or support plates may become easily bent. Avoid<br />
any damage to baffles so that the heat exchanger will function properly.<br />
10. Some suggested methods of cleaning either the shell side or tube side are listed<br />
below:<br />
• Circulating hot wash oil or light distillate through tube side or shell side will<br />
usually effectively remove sludge or similar soft deposits.<br />
• Soft salt deposits may be washed out by circulating hot fresh water.<br />
• Some commercial cleaning compounds such as ”Oakite” or ”Dowell” may be<br />
effective in removing more stubborn deposits. Use in accordance with the<br />
manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
11. Some tubes have inserts or longitudinal fins and can be damaged by cleaning when<br />
mechanical means are employed. Clean these types of tubes chemically or consult<br />
the nearest manufacturer representative for the recommended method of cleaning.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
90 7 Storage, Installation, <strong>Operation</strong> and Maintenance<br />
• If the scale is hard and the above methods are not effective, use a mechanical<br />
means. Neither the inside nor the outside of the tube should be hammered<br />
with a metallic tool. If it is necessary to use scrapers, they should not be sharp<br />
enough to cut the metal of the tubes. Take extra care when employing scrapers<br />
to prevent tube damage.<br />
Do not attempt to clean tubes by blowing steam through individual tubes. This<br />
overheats the individual tube and results in severe expansion strains and leaking<br />
tube-to-tubesheet joints.<br />
12. Table 2 shows safe loads for steel rods and eyebolts.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs<br />
replacement<br />
(This subject of chapter is collected from: Bruce W Schafer Framatome ANP, Inc. 155<br />
Mill Ridge Road Lynchburg, VA 24502 (434) 832-3360 bschafer@framatech.com)<br />
Abstract The traditional method of repairing degraded tubes in shell-and-tube heat<br />
exchangers is to remove the effected tubes from service by plugging. Since heat exchangers<br />
are designed with excess heat transfer capability, approximately 10% of tubes can be<br />
plugged before performance is affected. When the number of plugged tubes becomes<br />
excessive, heat exchanger efficiency is lost, resulting in reduced power output, high system<br />
pressure drop, further heat exchanger damage, or abnormal loads placed on other plant<br />
heat exchangers.<br />
As an option to component retubing or replacement, repair methods, including tube sleeving<br />
and tube expansion, have proven to be an effective method to repair defective tubes<br />
and keep the existing heat exchanger in service. For the sleeving process, a new tube<br />
section is installed inside the existing tube to bridge across the degraded area. Tube<br />
expansion is used to close off a gap between the tube and the tubesheet or end plate (to<br />
eliminate a leak path) or between the tube and tube support (to minimize vibration).<br />
While not all heat exchangers can be returned to their original design condition by performing<br />
tube repairs, in some instances it may be possible to get many more years of<br />
useful life out of a heat exchanger at a fraction the cost of replacement.<br />
This paper presents options which the Plant Maintenance Engineer should consider in<br />
making the repair versus replacement decision. This includes the repair options (sleeving<br />
and tube expansion), other conditions within the heat exchanger, and the effect of tube<br />
repair on heat exchanger performance.<br />
8.1 Introduction<br />
Traditionally, when maintenance is performed on shell-and-tube heat exchangers, the<br />
only options considered when tube defects are found are to plug tubes and, when the<br />
number of plugs became too great, replace the heat exchanger. The decision to replace<br />
the heat exchanger was based on a number of factors. These included: the number of<br />
tubes plugged, the number of forced outages due to tube damage (and the cost associated<br />
with replacing lost power and repairing the damaged tubes), the impact that the plugged<br />
heat exchanger is having on the plant (due to lost flow or heat transfer surface area),<br />
the rate at which tube plugging is occurring, the availability of funds to replace the heat<br />
exchanger, and the expected life of the unit (how much longer will the unit operate before<br />
retirement).<br />
From a sampling of industry data, tube failures have been shown to cause between 31%<br />
to 87% (depending on the data source) of the events related to feedwater heaters (1).<br />
Since so many of the failures were related to the tubing, the replacement of an entire heat<br />
exchanger due to damage in one area is an expensive as well as a schedule and manpower<br />
intensive option.<br />
The typical means for major heat exchanger repair included complete replacement, rebundling,<br />
and retubing, as described below.<br />
• For the replacement option, the entire heat exchanger shell and tube bundle are<br />
replaced with a new unit.<br />
• For rebundling, the shell is temporarily removed from the heat exchanger and the<br />
old tube bundle, including, at a minimum, tubes, tube supports, and tubesheet, are<br />
removed. A new tube bundle is inserted and the shell is welded back in place.<br />
• For retubing, either the shell (u-tube design) or tube side access cover (straight<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
91
92 8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement<br />
tubes) is removed from the heat exchanger and the old tubes are removed from the<br />
bundle. New tubes are then inserted and re-attached to the tubesheet (typically by<br />
either mechanical expansion, welding, or both). In many instances, the existing shell<br />
side hardware is used as-is, although some modifications may be made. Retubing<br />
is typically performed on straight tube heat exchangers, such as condensers and<br />
coolers.<br />
Since the 1970’s, tube sleeving has been used to allow damaged tubes to remain in service.<br />
The sleeves are installed by various means (roll, explosive, or hydraulic expansion,<br />
explosively welded, or press-fit or epoxied in place) over the defective area of the tube.<br />
Through the use of sleeving, which is a low-cost option to retubing, rebundling, or replacement,<br />
the useful life of a heat exchanger can be economically extended. The decision<br />
to perform sleeving also can be made with short notice as opposed to replacement (2-6<br />
weeks compared with 18 months), possibly allowing repairs to be performed the same<br />
outage that the damage is noted. Tube expansion also can be performed to minimize or<br />
eliminate leakage within heat exchangers. In the tubesheet, tubes can be re-expanded to<br />
strengthen the original tube-to-tubesheet joint, reducing or eliminating leakage and prolonging<br />
the life of the heat exchanger. Expansions also can be made deep within the tube<br />
to expand the tube into tube support plates and end plates. These expansion can reduce<br />
tube-to-plate clearance for vibration control or, at end plates, to minimize steam flow<br />
from the high to low pressure side of the plate.Since the 1970’s, tube sleeving has been<br />
used to allow damaged tubes to remain in service. The sleeves are installed by various<br />
means (roll, explosive, or hydraulic expansion, explosively welded, or press-fit or epoxied<br />
in place) over the defective area of the tube. Through the use of sleeving, which is a lowcost<br />
option to retubing, rebundling, or replacement, the useful life of a heat exchanger<br />
can be economically extended. The decision to perform sleeving also can be made with<br />
short notice as opposed to replacement (2-6 weeks compared with 18 months), possibly<br />
allowing repairs to be performed the same outage that the damage is noted.<br />
Tube expansion also can be performed to minimize or eliminate leakage within heat exchangers.<br />
In the tubesheet, tubes can be re-expanded to strengthen the original tubeto-tubesheet<br />
joint, reducing or eliminating leakage and prolonging the life of the heat<br />
exchanger. Expansions also can be made deep within the tube to expand the tube into<br />
tube support plates and end plates. These expansion can reduce tube-to-plate clearance<br />
for vibration control or, at end plates, to minimize steam flow from the high to low<br />
pressure side of the plate.<br />
8.2 Repair vs. Replace - Factors To Consider<br />
There are numerous factors to consider when deciding whether to repair the tubes in a<br />
heat exchanger or to perform a larger repair scope and rebundle or replace the component.<br />
The following factors should be considered when making the repair vs. replace decision.<br />
1. The budget available for repair or replacement needs to be determined. Typically,<br />
the cost of performing a substantial heat exchanger repair (consisting of plug removal,<br />
tube inspection, tube expansion, and sleeving) is less than 10% of the cost of<br />
replacing the unit. Because of the lower cost, the payback time on the repair option<br />
is much shorter than for replacement.<br />
If the heat exchanger is critical to plant operation (either from a safety, efficiency,<br />
or power production standpoint) or is resulting in costly forced outages, it may be<br />
possible to justify a 3 repair to the unit in the near-term and a scheduled replacement<br />
when a longer outage can be planned. If there are a large number of tube plugs<br />
to remove, or if they are difficult to remove (explosive or welded), then the cost to<br />
repair the heat exchanger will increase, and the scheduled time needed on-site may<br />
not fit within the outage window. If it appears that tube repair may be possible,<br />
it may be worthwhile to plug tubes, using removable plugs, until a certain quantity<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8.3 <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger maintenance Options 93<br />
of tubes are removed from service. At that point the plugs would be removed and<br />
sleeves installed, thereby minimizing the overall maintenance cost.<br />
2. The location and quantity of the tube defects need to be examined to decide if<br />
tube repair is an option. Tube repair may be appropriate if the damage is limited<br />
to a certain area of the tube, which would allow the use of a short repair sleeve.<br />
If the damage is over a significant portion of the tube, it is possible to install a<br />
longer sleeve (up to the full length of the tube) to ensure that all tube defects are<br />
repaired. However, if the u-bend region of the tube is damaged then tube repair is<br />
not possible. Also, it would not be possible to install a sleeve if a large portion of<br />
the tube had damage but there was inadequate clearance for a long sleeve at the<br />
tube end.<br />
3. One of the more important items to consider when deciding whether a heat exchanger<br />
can be repaired is the condition of the remainder of the heat exchanger.<br />
The condition of the shell side components, such as the impingement plates, tube<br />
supports, end plates, and other structural members, should be in good shape if a<br />
long term repair is being planned. An evaluation also should be made of the shell<br />
thickness in areas that are prone to shell erosion/corrosion. If the tube repair is only<br />
a short-term fix, to allow component operation until a replacement heat exchanger<br />
can be installed, the condition of the shell side is not as critical.<br />
4. The life expectancy of the power plant needs to be factored into the decision to<br />
repair or replace a heat exchanger. If the only problem with the heat exchanger is<br />
in one section of the tube, and the expected run time on the unit is relatively short,<br />
it would be advantageous to repair rather than replace the heat exchanger since it<br />
will be very difficult to pay back the cost for replacement over the remaining plant<br />
life.<br />
5. The outage time required to repair a heat exchanger, even when tube and shell side<br />
inspections are performed, is typically much less than for replacement. In addition,<br />
very few, if any, plant modifications need to be made to make the repairs. This<br />
allows other work to be performed in the vicinity of the heat exchanger. Along<br />
with the shorter outage duration, the site support required for repair is much less.<br />
Usually, there are no shell or head modifications required since all work can usually<br />
be performed through the manways and pass partition plates. Less repair equipment<br />
is required, resulting in less space being needed in the area of the heat exchanger<br />
for setup and storage. In addition, the time required to prepare for tube repair is<br />
much less than for replacement (2- 6 weeks compared with 18 months), allowing a<br />
decision on repair to be made just before, or even during, an outage.<br />
6. At nuclear plants, the added cost for the disposal of radioactively contaminated<br />
heat exchangers must be taken into account. Before disposal, there is the cost of<br />
surveying the heat exchangers for release and, if contamination is found, they must<br />
either be decontaminated or disposed of as radioactive waste. Tube repairs can<br />
eliminate these costs.<br />
7. If the heat exchanger is being replaced to eliminate detrimental materials in the<br />
cooling system (i.e. copper in the condensate/feedwater system) then tube sleeving<br />
will not be beneficial. The only solution would be to retube/rebundle/replace to<br />
change out the tube material.<br />
8.3 <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger maintenance Options<br />
There have always been options available to either repair or replace heat exchanger tubes<br />
in the event that tube leakage or degradation is present. The repair options include:<br />
1. Plug the tube<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
94 8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement<br />
2. Sleeving<br />
3. Tube expansion<br />
The replacement options include<br />
1. Retubing<br />
2. Rebundling<br />
3. Replace with new unit<br />
8.4 Repair option<br />
8.4.1 Plug<br />
The initial option, after the problem tubes have been located (either through non-destructive<br />
examinations, such as eddy current testing, visual inspections, or leak tests) is to plug the<br />
tube. Depending on the type of service and operating pressures of the heat exchanger,<br />
various types of plugs are employed. These include<br />
1. tapered fiber and metal pin plugs,<br />
2. rubber compression plugs,<br />
3. two piece ring and pin plugs,<br />
4. two piece serrated ring and pin plugs (installed with a hydraulic cylinder),<br />
5. welded plugs, and explosively welded plugs.<br />
In addition to the tube end plug, there also may be a stabilizer rod or cable that is inserted<br />
into the tube to minimize future tube vibration damage.<br />
At the beginning of the life of a heat exchanger, inserting a few plugs into damaged tubes<br />
has little effect on the performance of the heat exchanger. However, if heat exchanger<br />
problems continue, and the number of plugs increases significantly, it is possible that<br />
the heat exchanger will eventually reach a point that it will not handle the full load<br />
that is placed on it. This is due to a combination of loss of heat transfer area and the<br />
increased pressure drop. In addition, as the number of plugged tubes increases, abnormal<br />
temperature conditions (either hot or cold spots) may be set up in the heat exchanger.<br />
These conditions can result in an acceleration of tube damage, creating a faster demise<br />
of the heat exchanger.<br />
Once the number of plugs reaches a unacceptable level, the heat exchanger will need to be<br />
repaired, replaced, or bypassed. However, bypassing the unit is usually not recommended,<br />
at least for a long time period, since it will result in a loss of efficiency and heat transfer<br />
area. Also, the heat load from the bypassed heat exchanger will be transferred to another<br />
heat exchanger in the string, resulting in greater than normal operating flow rates and<br />
higher degradation in that heater.<br />
The following sections show the options that can be used to replace or repair the entire<br />
heat exchanger or just the tubes.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8.4 Repair option 95<br />
8.4.2 Sleeving<br />
An alternate approach to retubing, rebundling, or replacement of a heat exchanger is to<br />
install sleeves over the defective portions of the tubes. The sleeve consists of a smaller<br />
diameter piece of tubing that is inserted into the parent tube and positioned over the<br />
tube defects. After insertion, each end of the sleeve is expanded into the parent tube<br />
material. These expansions serve the dual function of structurally anchoring the sleeve<br />
into the tube and providing a leak limiting path, allowing the sleeve to become the new<br />
pressure boundary for the tube. This means that a sleeved tube can have a 100% throughwall<br />
indication and still remain in-service, since the sleeve is now the new structural and<br />
pressure boundary. The installation of the sleeve into the tube will allow the majority of<br />
the tube’s heat transfer area and flow to be maintained.<br />
If heat exchanger repair by sleeving is a possibility then a strategy needs to be used to<br />
prepare for future repair. It may be cost effective to plug a quantity of tubes, per the nondestructive<br />
examination results, each outage using a removable plug. When the quantity<br />
of plugged tubes reaches a certain level the plugs can be removed and sleeves installed.<br />
Using this approach will minimize the cost and time during each inspection outage while<br />
allowing the maximum tube repair later in the heat exchanger’s life.<br />
There are three types of sleeves that are installed into heat exchanger tubes. These are<br />
1. full length,<br />
2. partial length structural, and<br />
3. partial length barrier sleeves.<br />
The three types are discussed below. Figure Figure 8.1 shows the sleeve layout.<br />
Figure 8.1. <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger Sleeve <strong>Design</strong>s<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
96 8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement<br />
Full Length Sleeve<br />
These sleeves are installed from one end of the tube to the other in straight tubed heat<br />
exchangers. After insertion, the full length of the sleeve is expanded into the parent<br />
tube. This step serves the dual purpose of maintaining heat transfer as high as possible<br />
(typically 75%-90%) while minimizing flow pressure drop through the tube. After the full<br />
length expansion step, shown in Figure 8.2, the sleeve ends are trimmed flush with the<br />
existing tube ends and the sleeve is roll expanded into the tubesheet.<br />
The full length sleeve is typically used in a condenser or cooling water heat exchanger when<br />
the tubes have multiple defects along their length. Full length sleeving is an attractive<br />
option when a relatively small percentage of the tubes require repair. Through sleeving,<br />
the majority of the tube heat transfer area can be left in service, resulting in a heat<br />
exchanger that is close to its as designed condition.<br />
Full length sleeving is comparable in many ways to retubing in the methods employed to<br />
install the sleeves. However, since removal of the existing tube is not required, and the<br />
typical number of tubes that will be full length sleeved are below the number that would<br />
be retubed, the cost for material and manhours are much less than for retubing, making<br />
sleeving a cost-effective option to return and keep tubes in service.<br />
Partial Length Structural Sleeve<br />
Figure 8.2. Full Length Sleeve Expansion<br />
This type of sleeve is used to repair shorter defects in the tube. The sleeve can be<br />
installed anywhere along the straight length of the tube. Various methods are used to<br />
expand the sleeve in place. These include roll expansion (both in the tubesheet and in<br />
the freespan portion of the tube), hydraulic expansion in the freespan portion of the tube,<br />
and full length expansion. These expansion types are discussed below. The installation<br />
of a hydraulically expanded sleeve is shown in Figure 8.3.<br />
• If one end of the sleeve is in the tubesheet, a torque-controlled roll expansion will be<br />
made. This expansion is similar to the original tube-to-tubesheet roll. Freespan roll<br />
expansions are made to either a torque controlled setting or to a diameter controlled<br />
hardstop setting. Usually, freespan roll expansions are only used when the sleeve<br />
length is relatively short, since it can be difficult to insert a roll expander deep into<br />
the tube. Both the tubesheet and freespan roll expansion parameters are set so that<br />
they can provide both the structural and leakage requirements for the sleeve.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8.4 Repair option 97<br />
• For sleeves installed deep within the tube, a hydraulic expansion device is used to<br />
connect the sleeve to the tube. The expander consists of multiple plastic bladders<br />
that are filled with high pressure water. As the water pressure increases, the bladders<br />
expanded against the inside of the sleeve, pushing the sleeve into the tube. The<br />
expansion process, which is computer controlled, continues until either a preset<br />
volume of water or a preset pressure is reached. At this point the sleeve is properly<br />
expanded and the bladders are depressurized. Hydraulic expansions can be made<br />
anywhere along the tube length since the expander is connected to flexible high<br />
pressure tubing and is not restricted by tube end access. The expansion parameters<br />
are qualified to meet the proper structural and leakage requirements for the sleeve.<br />
• Full length expansions are not usually used for structural or leak limiting purposes<br />
but instead are used to improve heat transfer and flow through the sleeve and to<br />
close the annulus between the sleeve and tube. The full length expansion is made<br />
by placing a tool, with seals on each end, into the sleeve. The inside of the sleeve<br />
is filled and then pressurized with water to a preset pressure setting, expanding the<br />
sleeve into tight contact with the tube. After the full length expansion is made,<br />
the ends of the sleeve are typically either roll or hydraulically expanded to form the<br />
structural and leak limiting sleeve-to-tube joint.<br />
Many times, the partial length structural sleeves are used to repair indications at one<br />
particular area of the tube, such as wear damage at tube support locations, cracking<br />
in roll transitions, or pitting indications at one discreet location along the tube length.<br />
Longer versions of these sleeves also have been used to repair an entire damaged section<br />
of a heat exchanger, such as a desuperheater or drain cooler section of a feedwater heater.<br />
Because of the wide variety of uses, the sleeve length can range from as short as 1 foot to<br />
over 12 feet in length.<br />
Qualification testing is performed on the structural sleeves to ensure that they can withstand<br />
the design temperature and pressure conditions imposed on them. The test results<br />
must show that the sleeve will be the new pressure boundary even with a 100% throughwall<br />
indication in the parent tube. Sleeves of this type, using mechanical expansions (roll<br />
and hydraulic), have reliably been in-service for more than 15 years.<br />
Partial Length Barrier Sleeve<br />
These sleeves, also known as shields, are used at the ends of the tubes to act as a barrier<br />
to tube end erosion. These sleeves are usually very thing, are not designed to act as a<br />
pressure boundary or structural repair, and are installed in areas of high turbulence. The<br />
materials for these sleeves are compatible with the existing tube material and may include<br />
plastic inserts. The sleeves are either roll or hydraulic expanded or pressed or epoxied<br />
in place. If tube end erosion is occurring, or is expected to occur, the use of these tube<br />
end sleeves will protect and prolong the life of the parent tube, although over time tube<br />
erosion may begin to occur at the end of the sleeve. Many heat exchanger tube ends have<br />
been protected with shields, significantly prolonging the life of the tubes.<br />
Items to Consider for Tube Sleeving<br />
Prior to choosing to perform tube sleeving, the following factors should be considered.<br />
• The length, location, and quantity of tube defects that would require sleeving need<br />
to be determined. If the defects are in one or a few short areas then either a single or<br />
a couple of partial length sleeves could be used. However, if the defects are spaced<br />
throughout the length of the tube, then the only option would be a full length sleeve.<br />
The parent tube in the area where the sleeve will be expanded is to be defect free.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
98 8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement<br />
Figure 8.3. Partial Length - Hydraulically Expanded Structural Sleeve Installation<br />
This will insure the highest sleeve-to-tube joint integrity. Also, the tube support<br />
designations must be clearly identified to insure that the sleeve is installed at the<br />
correct location along the tube length. This is especially true in areas where there<br />
may be skipped baffles and the tube only touches every other support plate.<br />
• The condition of the remainder of the tube away from the sleevable defects needs<br />
to be known. If there are u-bend defects that may require plugging then the tube<br />
should not be sleeved. Sleeving is an option if the remainder of the tube is in good<br />
shape.<br />
• The space available at the tube end to insert a sleeve and its installation tooling<br />
needs to be known, as shown in Figure 8.4. If a short, partial length sleeve is being<br />
used, the amount of space required is not as critical, although there can still be<br />
access issues around the tubesheet periphery for hemi-head channel covers and at<br />
pass partition plates. However, if a full length sleeve is required, there will need to<br />
be a significant amount of clearance from the tubesheet face.<br />
• Inspection records need to be reviewed to determine if there are any tube inside<br />
diameter (ID) restrictions that would block the sleeve from being inserted to the<br />
target location. The size of the eddy current probe used for the inspection, plus any<br />
other hardware that has been inserted into the tube, can be used to help determine<br />
the tube ID access issues.<br />
• The post-sleeving tube inspection requirements need to be considered. Typically,<br />
the ability to inspect the tube beyond a sleeve is not a significant issue. While<br />
the presence of the sleeve reduces the inside diameter of the tube, which will result<br />
in the need for a smaller inspection probe, the probe will remain large enough<br />
to detect pluggable tube indications (usually greater than 40%), however small<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8.4 Repair option 99<br />
indications may go undetected. As part of the post-sleeve inspection, the sleeve and<br />
its attachment to the tube should be examined. There is no need to inspect the<br />
section of the parent tube between the sleeve expansions since this is no longer part<br />
of the pressure boundary.<br />
• If tube cleaning is to be performed in the heat exchanger, then the type of sleeve to<br />
be installed needs to be evaluated. If on-line cleaning is performed, the sleeve size<br />
cannot restrict the passage of the balls or brushes. For off-line cleaning, the projectiles<br />
need to pass through the sleeve without becoming stuck. Many sleeves that are<br />
installed in tubes that require cleaning are full length expanded to ensure the best<br />
results for the cleaning equipment. If it appears that tube sleeving is possible, then<br />
information will be needed to ensure that the heat exchanger is properly repaired.<br />
The following information is used when planning for sleeving.<br />
• Tube sleeving will need to be coordinated with eddy current inspection and plug<br />
removal.<br />
• If it is expected that sleeving may be performed, then it is important that the proper<br />
sleeve material be purchased in advance of the job.<br />
• The sleeve material needs to be compatible with the heat exchanger parent tubing<br />
and with the water chemistry within the heat exchanger. The galvanic corrosion<br />
potential between the sleeve and tube needs to be determined. Also, effects of crevice<br />
corrosion between the sleeve and tube, in the heat exchanger water chemistry, need<br />
to be considered to determine if sleeving is a viable repair option.<br />
• The sleeve dimensions need to fit the heat exchanger operating and design conditions<br />
plus any restrictions within the tube ID. The sleeve outside diameter (OD) is<br />
to be designed to fit into the tube but must be long enough to limit the amount of<br />
sleeve expansion. The sleeve wall thickness needs to be sized for the heat exchanger<br />
operating parameters, including any ASME Code minimum wall thickness calculations,<br />
if needed. The sleeve length must be long enough to span the expected tube<br />
defects but needs to be sized to fit any tube end clearance restrictions.<br />
• Before installing sleeves into heat exchanger tubes, testing needs to be performed to<br />
set the installation parameters. Depending on the type of sleeve being used, these<br />
tests may include setting the rolling torque, hydraulic expansion constants, and full<br />
length expansion pressure. In addition, depending on the application for the sleeve,<br />
there may be a need to do qualification testing, which would consist of hydrostatic<br />
leak and pressure tests and temperature and pressure cycling. These tests would<br />
verify that the expansion parameters were set correctly for the sleeve application.<br />
• If a large quantity of sleeves are being installed, it may be necessary to calculate<br />
the heat transfer and flow loss due to sleeving. These calculations will give a sleeveto-plug<br />
ratio that can be used to determine the expected improvement in heat<br />
exchanger performance after sleeving is complete (and tubes have been returned to<br />
service, if applicable).<br />
• The sleeve may need to be full-length expanded based on the heat exchanger operating<br />
environment. However, the production rates for sleeve installation are lower<br />
when full length expansions are performed. While full length expansion is typically<br />
not needed in many applications, such as most feedwater heaters, it should be<br />
considered for the following.<br />
– if tube ID cleaning needs to routinely be performed<br />
– if a long sleeve is being inserted that would severely restrict the tube’s heat<br />
transfer or flow<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
100 8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement<br />
– if the tube-to-sleeve crevice needs to be eliminated in a hostile water chemistry<br />
environment<br />
– if there are large eddy current probe fill factor restrictions<br />
8.4.3 Tube Expansion<br />
Figure 8.4. Required Clearance for Sleeve Installation<br />
In addition to sleeving, it is possible to expand the tube to improve the heat exchanger<br />
performance. These tube repairs can minimize further tube damage and maximize the<br />
useful life of the heat exchanger. Two methods of tube expansion can be performed. One<br />
is to expand deep within the tube to close off a leak path between the tube and the end<br />
plate. The other is to re-expand the tube into the tubesheet to minimize tube-to-shell<br />
side leakage.<br />
Tube-to-End Plate Expansion<br />
In some heat exchangers, typically feedwater heaters, there are internal plates which<br />
separate one zone of the heat exchanger from another (usually condensing [steam] from<br />
drain cooler [liquid]). Due to the pressure differential across the plate, and the different<br />
temperatures and phases between the two sections, it is important that leakage not occur<br />
through the plate. However, in some feedwater heaters, the plate design is too thin,<br />
resulting in leakage of steam from the condensing to the drain cooler zones, as shown in<br />
Figure 8.5. When this occurs there is erosion of the end plate and tube vibration due to<br />
the high steam velocities and the steam condensing to liquid in the drain cooler region.<br />
The vibration causes wear at the tube supports which can lead to tube failure. The<br />
leakage of steam also increases the drain cooler temperature, resulting in a less efficient<br />
heat exchanger. Expanding the tube can reduce the gap between the tube and the end<br />
plate. The expansion can be performed using either a roll or hydraulic expander. Once the<br />
expander is in position the tube is expanded until it contacts the end plate. An accurate<br />
expansion, which does not over-expand the tube into the plate (the tube needs to be able<br />
to slide in the plate after expansion so that it does not buckle during heatup/cooldown),<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8.4 Repair option 101<br />
Figure 8.5. Required Clearance for Sleeve Installation<br />
needs to be performed. This can be achieved by using a computer controlled hydraulic<br />
expansion that automatically shuts off the pressurization system when it detects that the<br />
tube has contacted the plate.<br />
After the tubes are expanded into the end plate, the steam flow is minimized or eliminated,<br />
reducing the drain cooler temperatures and increases plant efficiency. Further tube<br />
damage, in the form of tube wear and adjacent tubes impacting on one another, will be<br />
reduced to nearly zero and the vibration operating stresses will be reduced significantly.<br />
The life of the heat exchanger will be increased at a minimal cost as compared with<br />
replacement.<br />
Tube-to-Tubesheet Expansion<br />
In some heat exchanger designs, with a certain combination of materials, leaks develop<br />
between the tube and tubesheet. In many low pressure units, the tube is only expanded<br />
into the tubesheet, with no subsequent weld. Many of the leaks that occur in these units<br />
are the result of a fabrication error and can be corrected by re-expanding the joint to<br />
the correct expansion size. However, leakage occasionally occurs in high pressure heat<br />
exchangers, typically feedwater heaters, even when the tubes have been welded to the<br />
tubesheet. The two prime causes of this leakage are in areas where the original tube-totubesheet<br />
weld has either cracked or eroded due to flow (in the case of soft materials, such<br />
as carbon steel) or where there is a crack in a tube-totubesheet expansion transition.<br />
• For the first case it may be possible to re-expand the tube using a qualified roll<br />
expansion process. The expansion would increase the contact pressure between the<br />
tube and tubesheet, increasing the resistance to flow and decreasing or eliminating<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
102 8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement<br />
leakage. This process could be performed on existing leaking tubes or preventatively<br />
on all tubes in the tubesheet.<br />
• If cracking is occurring at the original tube expansion transition it may be possible<br />
to re-expand the tube deeper in the tubesheet (unless the cracking is occurring<br />
very close to the shell side of the tubesheet). The tube would be expanded using<br />
a qualified roll expansion process, to place the tube into tight contact with the<br />
tubesheet. This expansion would increase the contact pressure between the tube and<br />
tubesheet, increasing the resistance to flow and decreasing or eliminating leakage.<br />
This process could be performed either on existing leaking tubes or preventatively<br />
on all tubes in the tubesheet.<br />
Re-expanding tubes that either may be leaking or that could develop leaks in the future<br />
could significantly extend the life of an otherwise good heat exchanger. By re-expanding<br />
the tubes, forced outages can be avoided and damage from the high pressure water spraying<br />
on adjacent tubes and on the shell will be eliminated. The cost to perform tube<br />
re-expansions will be minimal when compared with the cost of replacement heat exchangers<br />
and the cost of forced outages.<br />
Items to Consider for Tube Expansion Repair<br />
The following factors should be considered to determine if tube expansion is possible.<br />
• The portion of the tube to be expanded needs to be determined.<br />
– If leakage is occurring through the end plate, the expander will need to be long<br />
enough to reach the end plate location. The tube should be expanded using a<br />
process, such as hydraulic expansion, that will not lock the tube into the end<br />
plate. This expansion will not only reduce leakage through the plate but also<br />
will minimize future tube vibration due to the tight fit between the tube and<br />
plate.<br />
– If leakage is occurring within the tubesheet, due to either weld or tube cracking,<br />
a re-expansion process may be used. This process, typically a roll expansion,<br />
will reexpand the tube into the tubesheet to limit or eliminate leakage from<br />
the tube to the shell side of the heat exchanger.<br />
• The condition of the remainder of the tube needs to be known. If there are cracks<br />
along the entire tube length then re-expanding the tube alone will not result in an<br />
improvement in heat exchanger performance.<br />
• The space available at the tube end to insert the expansion tooling needs to be<br />
known. Usually either a roll or hydraulic expander will be used for this process.<br />
Unless a roll expansion is being performed at the end plate, the usual repair tooling<br />
is relatively short, although there can still be access issues around the tubesheet<br />
periphery for hemi-head channel covers and at pass partition plates.<br />
• For tube end plate expansions, the eddy current inspection records need to be<br />
reviewed to determine if there are any tube inside diameter restrictions that would<br />
block the expander from being inserted to the end plate location. The size of the<br />
eddy current probe used for the inspection, plus any other hardware that has been<br />
inserted into the tube, can be used to help determine the tube ID access issues.<br />
The potential for any tube end restrictions, that might limit tooling insertion into<br />
the tube, also need to be known so that tooling can be prepared to eliminate the<br />
restriction.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8.5 Replacement option 103<br />
If it appears that tube expansion is possible, then information will be needed to ensure<br />
that the heat exchanger is properly repaired. The following information is used when<br />
planning for tube expansion.<br />
• Tube expansion will need to be coordinated with eddy current inspection and plug<br />
removal.<br />
• The tube expander design (diameter and length) needs to be based on the requirements<br />
for the expansion. Before performing tube expansions into heat exchanger<br />
tubes, testing needs to be performed to set the tooling operating parameters. Depending<br />
on the type of expansion, these tests may include setting the rolling torque<br />
for tubesheet re-expansions or setting the hydraulic expansion constants for end<br />
plate expansions. In addition, for the tube-intotubesheet re-expansion process, qualification<br />
testing should be performed. This would consist of hydrostatic leak and<br />
pressure tests and temperature and pressure cycling. These tests would verify that<br />
the expansion parameters were set correctly for the tube reexpansions. exchanger.<br />
8.5 Replacement option<br />
8.5.1 Retubing<br />
The tubes can be replaced, if the unit has:<br />
• straight tubes,<br />
• good access, and<br />
• the remaining components (shell, tube supports, internal structural pieces) of the<br />
heat exchanger are in good shape.<br />
The old tubes are removed from the unit and new ones, typically manufactured from<br />
an improved material, are inserted, and then expanded, into place. Insertion of the new<br />
tubes is shown in Figure 8.6. In addition to performing retubing to replace damaged<br />
tubes, retubing has been performed to eliminate detrimental materials (such as copper<br />
from condenser tubes) to minimize damage to other equipment within the plant (nuclear<br />
steam generators or fossil boilers).<br />
Figure 8.6. Condenser Retubing<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
104 8 <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger tube side mainenance (Repair vs replacement<br />
8.5.2 Rebundling<br />
Some heat exchangers are designed to be rebundled rather than replaced. For these units<br />
the entire tube bundle, including tubes, tubesheet, and tube supports are replaced, as<br />
shown in Figure 8.7. The original shell and any other internal structural pieces would<br />
be reused (although any necessary internal repairs could be made when the shell was<br />
removed). The new tube bundle can be manufactured to ensure that original design<br />
problems with the existing unit are corrected. However, the same basic design must<br />
be maintained since the new bundle must fit within the existing heat exchanger shell.<br />
Rebundling costs about 15-25% more than retubing.<br />
Figure 8.7. <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger Rebundling<br />
8.5.3 Complete replacement (New unit)<br />
A third and typically widely used option is to replace the entire heat exchanger, as shown<br />
in Fig.8.8 . Full replacement allows alternate tube materials, changes in heat transfer area,<br />
and structural changes to be employed, including added clearances in areas where erosion<br />
or other problems may be occurring, to ensure that the current heat exchanger problems<br />
do not re-occur in the future. However, the cost associated with a full replacement is the<br />
greatest of the three options, about 5% more than for rebundling . In addition, there<br />
are no guarantees that the new heat exchanger design will not have new, unanticipated<br />
problems.<br />
Figure 8.8. <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger Replacement<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
8.6 Conclusions 105<br />
8.6 Conclusions<br />
The costs associated with heat exchanger replacement can be significant. These costs<br />
include the new heat exchanger or tube bundle, the manpower required to remove the<br />
old and install the new heat exchanger components, plant modifications to allow for the<br />
removal of the heat exchanger, and the amount of outage time associated with replacement.<br />
In addition, the replacement of a heat exchanger can adversely affect other work<br />
going on in the their vicinity. Because of the cost and time involved, and if the damage<br />
is confined to only the tubing (which is typically the case), repair of the heat exchanger,<br />
through either sleeving or tube expansion, should be considered. If the tube damage is<br />
confined to one general area, there is a good possibility that the expense of a replacement<br />
can be avoided. In addition, the time required to prepare for tube repair is much less<br />
than for replacement (2-6 weeks compared with 18 months), allowing a decision on repair<br />
to be made just before, or even into, an outage.<br />
By removing plugs and installing sleeves, it is possible to return lost heat transfer area to<br />
service. Tubes that would be likely to fail in the near term also can be repaired. This will<br />
improve the performance and reliability of the heat exchanger. The cost to perform the<br />
repairs is also much less than for replacement (usually less than 1/10th the cost). Sleeving<br />
has been shown to be a proven tube repair technique, having been performed since the<br />
1970’s. During this time, tube repairs have economically extended the useful life of heat<br />
exchangers worldwide.<br />
As the number of plugged tubes approaches the upper limits or if damage is consistently<br />
occurring in one area of a heat exchanger, tube repair, through both sleeving and tube<br />
expansions, should be considered to minimize future damage and extend the life of the<br />
heat<br />
The following table shows the various heat exchanger repair options and the factors to<br />
be considered when choosing each of the options. Note that the table contains selected<br />
criteria for evaluating component repair versus replacement options. A final decision to<br />
implement a particular option should be made on a case by case basis with proper weight<br />
given to all factors. The information listed in this table is for relative comparison purposes<br />
only.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
106 9 Troubleshooting<br />
9 Troubleshooting<br />
9.1 <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers’ problems<br />
<strong>Heat</strong> transfer equipment provides the economic and process viability for many plant operations.<br />
The basis for successful application of such equipment depends on the designer.<br />
The problem that should be anticipated by the design to avoid high maintenance or<br />
cleaning and costly shut down production include:<br />
1. Fouling<br />
2. Leakage<br />
3. Corrosion<br />
To anticipate maintenance problems the designer should need to be familiar with the<br />
plant location, process flow sheet, plant operation. Some of the questions that must be<br />
considered are:<br />
1. will the heat exchanger need cleaning? how often? what cleaning method will be<br />
used?<br />
2. what penalty will the plant pay for leakages between the tubeside and shell side?<br />
3. what kind of production upsets can occur that could affect the heat exchanger?will<br />
cycling occur?<br />
4. how will heat exchanger be started up and shut down?<br />
5. will the heat exchanger be likely to require repairs? if so, will the repairs present<br />
any special problem?<br />
9.2 Fouling<br />
9.2.1 Costs of fouling<br />
• Increased maintenance costs<br />
• Over-sizing and/or redundant (stand-by)equipment<br />
• Special materials and/or design considerations<br />
• Added cost of cleaning equipment ,chemicals<br />
• Hazardous cleaning solution disposal<br />
• Reduced service life and added energy costs<br />
• Increased costs of environmental regulations<br />
• Loss of plant capacity and/or efficiency Loss of waste heat recovery options<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
9.2 Fouling 107<br />
9.2.2 Facts about fouling<br />
• 25 YEARS AGO heat exchanger fouling was referred to as ”the major unresolved<br />
problem in heat transfer” ?<br />
• the total cost of fouling - in highly industrialized nations - has been projected at<br />
0.25% of the GNP ?<br />
• the total annual cost of fouling in the U.S. is now estimated at 18 billion ?<br />
• the total annual cost of fouling specifically focused on shell and tube exchangers in<br />
the process industries is now estimated at 6 billion ?<br />
9.2.3 Types of Fouling<br />
• Precipitation / Crystallization - dissolved inorganic salts with inverse solubility characteristics<br />
• Particulate / Sedimentation - suspended solids, insoluble corrosion products, sand,<br />
silt<br />
• Chemical Reaction - common in petroleum refining and polymer production<br />
• Corrosion - material reacts with fluid to form corrosion products, which attach to<br />
the heat transfer surface to form nucleation sites<br />
• Biological - initially micro-fouling, usually followed by macro-fouling<br />
• Solidification - ice formation, paraffin waxes<br />
9.2.4 Fouling Mechanisms<br />
• Initiation - most critical period - when temperature, concentration and velocity<br />
gradients, oxygen depletion zones and crystal nucleation sites are established - a<br />
few minutes to a few weeks<br />
• Migration - most widely studied phenomenon - involving tranport of foulant to<br />
surface and various diffusion transport mechanisms<br />
• Attachment - begins the formation of the deposit<br />
• Transformation or Aging - another critical period when physical or chemical changes<br />
can increase deposit strenght and tenacity Removal or<br />
• Re-entrainment - dependent upon deposit strength - removal of fouling layers by<br />
dissolution, erosion or spalling - or by ”randomly distributed turbulent bursts”<br />
9.2.5 Conditions Influencing Fouling<br />
• Operating Parameters<br />
1. velocity<br />
2. surface temperature<br />
3. bulk fluid temperature<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger Parameters<br />
1. exchanger configuration<br />
2. surface material<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
108 9 Troubleshooting<br />
3. surface structure<br />
• Fluid Properties<br />
1. suspended solids<br />
2. dissolved solids<br />
3. dissolved gases<br />
4. trace elements<br />
9.2.6 Fouling control<br />
1. Good design:<br />
(a) Forced circulation heat excahnger. Forced circulation calandria is better than<br />
natural circulation calandria. This is to obtain a velocity of 10-15ft/sec. Although<br />
the cost of pumps and power added considerably to the cost of the<br />
equipment. This would be compared to the cost of production losses and cost<br />
for cleaning in order to arrive to at an economical design for a particular process<br />
application.<br />
(b) Good shell side avoids eddies and dead zones where solid can accumulate. Inlet<br />
and outlet connections should be located at the bottom and top of the shell<br />
side and tube side to avoid creating dead zones and unvented areas.<br />
(c) The use of metal that will not foul due to accumulation of corrosion products is<br />
important, especially with cooling waters. Copper, copper alloy and stainless<br />
steels are satisfactory for most cooling waters<br />
2. The fouling fluid should be inside tube. Hence easily removable flat cover plates<br />
would be installed on the channel to facilitate cleaning if frequent physical cleaning<br />
is necessary. Horizontal installation would probably be chosen to avoid the cost of<br />
scaffold usually required for physically cleaning a vertical exchanger<br />
3. Increasing tube velocity to 10-15ft/s lengthen the cleaning intervals<br />
4. Using heat transfer equipment with single flow channel will often reduce fouling due<br />
to sedimentation. For example spiral plate heat exchanger may be selected in place<br />
of a multipass shell and tube heat exchanger unit to avoid settling of suspended<br />
solids in the shell side and at the bottom of the tube side bottom of the tube side<br />
channel.<br />
9.2.7 Fouling cleaning methods<br />
1. Chemical cleaning: Various chemicals (acids, chlorine) have been used to reduce<br />
fouling and restore tube cleanliness. Acid may either be strong (which damage the<br />
equipment) or week (citric, formic, sulfamic) these are less effective. Acid cleaning<br />
is limited to once a year or less. The use of chlorine is being cutback or eliminated<br />
in many regions by government regulations.<br />
2. Manual cleaning. Method include periodic cleaning with rubber plugs, nylon brushes,<br />
metal scrapers or turbining tools. This method is expensive, intermittent (between<br />
cleaning fouling builds up rapidly)<br />
3. Rubber - ball cleaning: Automatic cleaning by means sponge -rubber balls is economical<br />
in areas where deposition, pollutants, chlorides and other corrodents exists.<br />
These ball distribute themselfs at random through the condenser, passing through<br />
a tube at an average of one every five minutes. slightly larger in diameter than the<br />
tube, they wipe the surface clean of fouling and deposits<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
9.3 Leakage/Rupture of the <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Surface 109<br />
9.3 Leakage/Rupture of the <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Surface<br />
Leaks may develop at<br />
1. the tube-to-tubesheet joints of fixed tube sheet exchanger due<br />
(a) to differential thermal expansion between the tube and shell causes overstressing<br />
of the rolled joints, or<br />
(b) thermal cycling caused by frequent shutdowns or batch operation of the process<br />
may cause the tubes to loosen in the tube holes.<br />
2. Leaks may occur due to tube failure cause by vibration or differential thermal expansion<br />
or dryout (for boilers and evaporators)<br />
9.3.1 Cost of leakage<br />
1. Large production losses or maintenance cost<br />
2. Contamination of product:The leak/rupture of tubes leads to contamination or overpressure<br />
of the low-pressure side. Failure to maintain separation between heat transfer<br />
and process fluids may lead to violent reaction in the heat transfer equipment<br />
or in the downstream processing equipment.<br />
9.3.2 Cause of differential thermal expansion<br />
1. Unusual situation that lead to unexpected differential thermal expansion, for example,<br />
the tube side of a fixed-tube sheet condenser may be subjected to steam<br />
temperature, with no coolant in the shell whenever a distillation column is steamed<br />
out in preparation for maintenance. Or an upset in the chemical process may subject<br />
the tubes to high temperatures<br />
2. Start up at high temperature<br />
3. Vibration (if the velocity at the inlet exceeded the critical velocity for two phase<br />
flow)<br />
4. Dryout of the tube cause by insufficient coolant or local overheating<br />
Remedy of thermal expansion<br />
1. Use of U tube or floating head instead of fixed tube sheet<br />
2. Welding the tube to the tube sheet<br />
3. Double tube sheet<br />
4. Use large nozzle or vapor belts to give velocity well below the critical<br />
To make the heat transfer process inherently safer, designers must look at possible interactions<br />
between heating/cooling fluids and process fluids. For relatively low-pressure<br />
equipment ( 1000 psig), however, a complete failure should be considered<br />
credible, regardless of pressure differential.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
110 9 Troubleshooting<br />
9.4 Corrosion<br />
The heat transfer surface reacts chemically with elements of the fluid stream producing<br />
a less conductive, corrosion layer on all or part of the surface.<br />
9.4.1 Corrosion effects<br />
1. Premature metal failures<br />
2. the deposit of corrosion products reduce both heat transfer and flow rate.<br />
9.4.2 Causes of corrosion<br />
High content of total dissolved solids (TDS), the dissimilarity of the metal, dissolved<br />
oxygen, penetrating ions like chlorides and sulphates, the low pH and presence of various<br />
other impurities are the prime cause of corrosion in the heat exchanger.<br />
9.4.3 Type of corrosion<br />
• stress corrosion<br />
• galvanic corrosion<br />
• uniform corrosion<br />
• Pitting<br />
• Crevice Corrosion<br />
9.4.4 Stress corrosion<br />
• Differential expansion between tubes and shell in fixed-tube-sheet exchangers can<br />
develop stresses, which lead to stress corrosion.<br />
• Overthinning: Expanding the tube into the tube sheet reduces the tube wall thickness<br />
and work-hardens the metal.<br />
• The induced stresses can lead to stress corrosion.<br />
Controlling Stress Corrosion Cracking<br />
• Proper selection of the appropriate material.<br />
• Remove the chemical species that promotes cracking.<br />
• Change the manufacturing process or design to reduce the tensile stresses.<br />
9.4.5 Galvanic corrosion<br />
Galvanic corrosion is frequently referred to as dissimilar metal corrosion. Galvanic corrosion<br />
can occur when two dissimilar materials are coupled in a corrosive electrolyte.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
9.4 Corrosion 111<br />
9.4.6 Pitting<br />
Pitting is a localized form of corrosive attack. Pitting corrosion is typified by the formation<br />
of holes or pits on the tube surface.<br />
Causes:<br />
• dissolved oxygen content<br />
• eposition of corrosion products<br />
Methods for reducing the effects of pitting corrosion: Reduce the aggressiveness of the<br />
environment (pH, O2) Use more pitting resistant materials Improve the design of the<br />
system<br />
9.4.7 Uniform or rust corrosion<br />
Some common methods used to prevent or reduce general corrosion are listed below:<br />
• Coatings<br />
• Inhibitors<br />
• Cathodic protection<br />
• Proper materials selection<br />
9.4.8 Crevice corrosion<br />
Crevice corrosion is a localized form of corrosive attack. Crevice corrosion occurs at<br />
narrow openings or spaces between two metal surfaces or between metals and nonmetal<br />
surfaces.Some examples of crevices are listed below:<br />
• Flanges<br />
• Deposits<br />
• Washers<br />
• Rolled tube ends<br />
• Threaded joints<br />
• O-rings<br />
• Gaskets<br />
• Lap joints<br />
• Sediment<br />
Some methods for reducing the effects of crevice corrosion :<br />
• Eliminate the crevice from the design. For example close fit. A 3-mm- long gap is<br />
thus created between the tube and the tube hole at this tube-sheet face. The tube<br />
is allowed to protrude 3 mm of the tube sheet.<br />
• Select materials more resistant to crevice corrosion<br />
• Reduce the aggressiveness of the environment<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
112 9 Troubleshooting<br />
9.4.9 Materials of Construction<br />
The various parts of the heat exchanger (tube, shell, tube sheet, baffles, front head, rear<br />
head, nozzles,...) may be manufactured from same metal or dissimilar metals. Individual<br />
components may be fabricated from single metal or bimetallic.<br />
For the selection of material of construction, the corrosion chart must be consulted (Appendix<br />
C of Coulson and Richardson [29]). The chart gives metal (alloy) vs chemical at<br />
various temperatures. Note:Before using the corrosion chart the notation given should<br />
read thoroughly.<br />
9.4.10 Fabrication<br />
Expanding the tube into the tube sheet reduces the tube wall thickness and work-hardens<br />
the metal. The induced stresses can lead to stress corrosion. Differential expansion<br />
between tubes and shell in fixed-tube-sheet exchangers can develop stresses, which lead<br />
to stress corrosion.<br />
When austenitic stainless-steel tubes are used for corrosion resistance, a close fit between<br />
the tube and the tube hole is recommended in order to minimize work hardening and the<br />
resulting loss of corrosion resistance. In order to facilitate removal and replacement of<br />
tubes it is customary to roller-expand the tubes to within 3 mm of the shellside face of<br />
the tube sheet. A 3-mm- long gap is thus created between the tube and the tube hole<br />
at this tube-sheet face. In some services this gap has been found to be a focal point for<br />
corrosion.<br />
It is standard practice to provide a chamfer at the inside edges of tube holes in tube sheets<br />
to prevent cutting of the tubes and to remove burrs produced by drilling or reaming the<br />
tube sheet. In the lower tube sheet of vertical units this chamfer serves as a pocket<br />
to collect material, dirt, etc., and to serve as a corrosion center. Adequate venting of<br />
exchangers is required both for proper operation and to reduce corrosion.<br />
Improper venting of the water side of exchangers can cause alternate wetting and drying<br />
and accompanying chloride concentration, which is particularly destructive to the series<br />
300 stainless steels.<br />
Certain corrosive conditions require that special consideration be given to complete drainage<br />
when the unit is taken out of service.<br />
Particular consideration is required for the upper surfaces of tube sheets in vertical heat<br />
exchangers, for sagging tubes, and for shell-side baffles in horizontal units.<br />
9.5 Troubleshooting<br />
This chapter presents potential failure mechanisms for heat transfer equipment and suggests<br />
design alternatives for reducing the risks associated with such failures. The types<br />
of heat exchangers covered in this chapter include:<br />
• Shell and tube exchangers<br />
• Air cooled exchangers<br />
• Direct contact exchangers<br />
• Others types including helical, spiral, plate and frame, and carbon block exchangers<br />
This chapter presents only those failure modes that are unique to heat transfer equipment.<br />
Some of the generic failure scenarios pertaining to vessels may also be applicable to heat<br />
transfer equipment. Unless specifically noted, the failure scenarios apply to more than<br />
one class of heat transfer equipment.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
9.6 Past failure incidents 113<br />
9.6 Past failure incidents<br />
This section provides several case histories of incidents involving failure of heat transfer<br />
equipment to reinforce the need for the safe design practices presented in this chapter.<br />
9.6.1 Ethylene Oxide Redistillation Column Explosion:<br />
In March 1991, an Ethylene Oxide (EO) redistillation column exploded at a Seadrift,<br />
Texas chemical facility. The explosion was caused by energetic decomposition of essentially<br />
pure EO vapor and liquid mist inside the column.<br />
A set of extraordinary circumstances was found to have coincided, resulting in the catalytic<br />
initiation of decomposition in a localized region of a reboiler tube. Extensive investigation<br />
by reference [158] showed that:<br />
1. A low liquid level in the column, plus a coinciding temporary condensate backup<br />
and accumulation of inert gas in the reboiler shell, significantly diminished the EO<br />
liquid fraction leaving the reboiler. Nevertheless, sufficient heat transfer capacity remained<br />
to satisfy the vaporization rate required by the column controls, so operation<br />
appeared normal.<br />
2. A localized imbalance resulted in some reboiler tubes losing thermosyphon action,<br />
so that the existing EO was essentially all vapor. Due to ongoing reaction with<br />
traces of water, high boiling glycols accumulated in the stalled tubes, increasing<br />
the boiling point while reducing the heat flux and resulting mass flow rate. This<br />
self-reinforcing process continued leading to minimal EO vapor velocity through the<br />
stalled tubes. Since the vapor was no longer in equilibrium with boiling EO it could<br />
momentarily attain the 150 o C temperature of the reboiler steam supply.<br />
3. The insides of the reboiler tubes had collected a thin film of EO polymer containing<br />
percent-level amounts of catalytic iron oxides. This film had in numerous places<br />
peeled away from the tube wall producing a catalytic surface of low heat capacity<br />
and negligible effect on mass flow rate. EO vapor heating was aided by the absence of<br />
liquid plus the small vapor velocity through the stalled tubes. These conditions led<br />
to a rapid rate of film heating which encouraged a fast disproportionation reaction of<br />
EO to predominate over slower polymerization reactions. The previously unknown<br />
fast reaction between EO vapor and supported high surface area iron oxide led to a<br />
hotspot and initiation of vapor decomposition. Once ignited the EO decomposition<br />
flame spread rapidly through the column causing overpressurization.<br />
9.6.2 Brittle Fracture of a <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger<br />
An olefin plant was being restarted after repair work had been completed. A leak developed<br />
on the inlet flange of one of the heat exchangers in the acetylene conversion preheat<br />
system. To eliminate the leak, the control valve supplying feed to the conversion system<br />
was shut off and the acetylene conversion preheat system was depressured. Despite the<br />
fact that the feed control valve was given a signal to close, the valve allowed a small flow.<br />
High liquid level in an upstream drum may have allowed liquid carryover which resulted<br />
in extremely low temperature upon depressurization to atmospheric pressure.<br />
The heat exchanger that developed the leak was equipped with bypass and block valves<br />
to isolate the exchanger. After the leaking heat exchanger was bypassed, the acetylene<br />
conversion system was repressured and placed back in service. Shortly thereafter, the first<br />
exchanger in the feed stream to the acetylene converter system failed in a brittle manner,<br />
releasing a large volume of flammable gas. The subsequent fire and explosion resulted in<br />
two fatalities, seven serious burn cases, and major damage to the olefins unit.<br />
The acetylene converter pre-heater failed as a result of inadequate lowtemperature resistance<br />
during the low temperature excursion caused by depressuring the acetylene converter<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
114 9 Troubleshooting<br />
system. The heat exchanger that failed was fabricated from ASTM A515 grade 70 carbon<br />
steel. After the accident, all process equipment in the plant which could potentially<br />
operate at less than 200F was reviewed for suitable low-temperature toughness [116].<br />
Ed. Note: It should have been recognized that upstream cryogenic conditions may have<br />
a deleterious effect on downstream equipment during normal and abnormal operations.<br />
9.6.3 Cold Box Explosion<br />
Ethylene plants utilize a series of heat exchangers to transfer heat between a number of<br />
low temperature plant streams and the plant refrigeration systems. This collection of<br />
heat exchangers is known collectively as the ”cold box.” In one operating ethylene plant,<br />
a heat exchanger in the cold box that handled a stream fed to the demethanizer column<br />
required periodic heating and backflushing with methane to prevent excessive pressure<br />
drop due to the accumulation of nitrogen-containing compounds.<br />
During a plant upset which resulted in the shutdown of the plant refrigeration compressors,<br />
the temperature of the cold box began to increase. During this temperature transient an<br />
explosion occurred which destroyed the cold box and disabled the ethylene plant for about<br />
5 months. An estimated 20 tons of hydrocarbon escaped. Fortunately, the hydrocarbon<br />
did not ignite.<br />
An investigation revealed that the explosion was caused by the accumulation and subsequent<br />
violent decomposition of unstable organic compounds that formed at the low<br />
temperatures inside the cold box. The unstable ”gums55 were found to contain nitro<br />
and nitroso components on short hydrocarbon chains. The source of the nitrogen was<br />
identified as nitrogen oxides (NOx) present in a feed stream from a catalytic cracking<br />
unit. Operating upsets could have promoted unstable gums by permitting higher than<br />
normal concentrations of 1, 3-butadiene and 1, 3-cyclopentadiene to enter the cold box.<br />
To prevent NOx from entering the cold box, the feed stream from the catalytic cracking<br />
unit was isolated from the ethylene plant [87].<br />
9.7 Failure scenarios and design solutions<br />
Table 9.1 presents information on equipment failure scenarios and associated design solutions<br />
specific to heat transfer equipment.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
9.7 Failure scenarios and design solutions 115<br />
Figure 9.1. troubleshooting<br />
Figure 9.2. troubleshooting<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
116 9 Troubleshooting<br />
9.8 Discussion<br />
Figure 9.3. troubleshooting<br />
Figure 9.4. troubleshooting<br />
9.8.1 Use of Potential <strong>Design</strong> Solutions Table<br />
To arrive at the optimal design solution for a given application, use Tables 9.1-9.4 in conjunction<br />
with the design basis selection methodology presented earlier. Use of the design<br />
solutions presented in the table should be combined with sound engineering judgment and<br />
consideration of all relevant factors.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
9.8 Discussion 117<br />
9.8.2 Special Considerations<br />
This section contains additional information on selected design solutions. The information<br />
is organized and cross-referenced by the <strong>Operation</strong>al Deviation Number in the table.<br />
Leak/Rupture of the <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Surface (1-3)<br />
This common failure scenario may result from corrosion, thermal stresses, or mechanical<br />
stresses of heat exchanger internals. The leak/rupture of tubes leads to contamination or<br />
overpressure of the low-pressure side. Failure to maintain separation between heat transfer<br />
and process fluids may lead to violent reaction in the heat transfer equipment or in the<br />
downstream processing equipment. To make the heat transfer process inherently safer,<br />
designers must look at possible interactions between heating/cooling fluids and process<br />
fluids.<br />
For relatively low-pressure equipment ( 1000 psig), however, a complete failure should<br />
be considered credible, regardless of pressure differential.<br />
Double tube sheets or seal welding may be used for heat exchangers handling toxic chemicals.<br />
For heat transfer problems involving highly reactive/ hazardous materials, a triplewall<br />
heat exchanger may be used. This type of heat exchanger consists of three chambers<br />
and uses a neutral material to transfer heat between two highly reactive fluids. Alternatively<br />
two heat exchangers can be used with circulation of the neutral fluid between<br />
them.<br />
There are known cases of cooling tower fires that have resulted from contamination of<br />
cooling water with hydrocarbons attributable to tube leakage. Gas detectors and separators<br />
may be installed on the cooling water return lines, or in the cooling tower exhaust<br />
(air) stream.<br />
Thermal stresses can be reduced by limiting the temperature differences between<br />
the inlet and outlet streams. In addition, alternate flow arrangements may be<br />
used to avoid high thermal stresses. Thermal cycling of heat transfer equipment should<br />
be kept to a minimum to reduce the likelihood of leaks and ruptures.<br />
Fouling, or Accumulation of Noncondensable Gases (5)<br />
It is desirable to design heat exchangers to resist fouling. Sufficient tube side velocity may<br />
reduce fouling. However, higher tube side velocities may also lead to erosion problems.<br />
In some cases fouling will cause higher tube wall temperatures, leading to overheating of<br />
reactive materials, loss of tube strength, or excessive differential thermal expansion.<br />
Accumulation of noncondensable gases can result in loss of heat transfer capability. <strong>Heat</strong><br />
exchangers in condensing service may need a vent nozzle, or other means of removing<br />
noncondensable gases from the system.<br />
External Fire (9)<br />
Emergency relief devices are often sized for external fire. <strong>Heat</strong> transfer equipment, such<br />
as air coolers, present a unique challenge when it comes to sizing relief devices. These<br />
exchangers are designed with large heat transfer areas. This large surface area may result<br />
in very large heat input in case of external fire. Indeed, it may not be practical to install<br />
a relief device sized for external fire case due to large relief area requirements. Other<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
118 9 Troubleshooting<br />
mitigation measures, such as siting outside the potential fire zone or diking with sloped<br />
drainage, may be used to reduce the likelihood and magnitude of external fire impinging<br />
on the heat exchanger. Alternative heat exchanger designs may also be used to reduce<br />
the surface area presented to an external fire.<br />
9.9 Troubleshooting Examples<br />
9.9.1 Shell side temperature uncontrolled<br />
Control<br />
vlave<br />
55 C o<br />
125 C o<br />
Water<br />
30 C o<br />
Organic<br />
Symptom: Shellside outlet<br />
temperaturee cannot be<br />
controlled within desired<br />
range (55-62 oC)<br />
by<br />
controlling flow of 125 C o<br />
water to tubes. The heat<br />
exchanger is 4 tube pass.<br />
55-62 C o<br />
uncontrolled<br />
9.9.2 Shell assumed banana-shape<br />
487 C o<br />
200 C o<br />
67 C o<br />
70 C o<br />
Water<br />
30 C o<br />
Organic<br />
Diagnosis: <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger is<br />
considerablyo versized for the<br />
duty (because of an alternative<br />
service). Temperature correction<br />
factors F for LMTD fluctuate<br />
widely with small changes in<br />
tube side flow<br />
Control<br />
vlave<br />
Figure 9.5. Shell side temperature uncontrolled<br />
belows joint<br />
560 C o<br />
600 C o<br />
Figure 9.6. Shell assumed banana-shape<br />
55-62 C o<br />
controlled<br />
Bypass<br />
Cure: Tube side water<br />
temperature reduced to 70oC<br />
and control valve removed.<br />
Control valve is installed<br />
in new shellside bypass<br />
line<br />
Symptom: Shell assumed<br />
banana shape and piping<br />
connections leaked. leakage<br />
between tube and shell side<br />
Diagnosis: vertically cut baffle<br />
and inlets and outlets of top shell<br />
side, caused stratification of<br />
gases at top of shell. Poor<br />
distribution of hot gases lead<br />
to unequal expansionof tubes<br />
Cure: increase the number of baffles<br />
from two to three; weld baffles in the<br />
shell; install sealing strips at edges of<br />
bundle; installed three concentric cones<br />
in tube side inlet; install vapor belt - for<br />
shellside inlet nozzle; change baffles<br />
from vertical to horizontal cut.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
9.9 Troubleshooting Examples 119<br />
9.9.3 Steam condenser performing below design capacity<br />
Steam<br />
Vent<br />
ondensate<br />
Symptom: Air cooled steam<br />
condensor performing below<br />
design capacity.<br />
Diagnosis: Careful measurement<br />
tube levels discloded that tubes<br />
sloped 1/4 inch in wrong direction<br />
(rising toward condensate end)<br />
Cure: Raise inlet end to obtain 2 inch slope<br />
toward condensate outlet<br />
Figure 9.7. Steam condenser performing below design capacity<br />
9.9.4 Steam heat exchanger flooded<br />
When a heat exchanger ”stalls,” condensate floods the steam space and causes a variety<br />
of problems within the exchanger:<br />
Figure 9.8. Conventional motor driven condensate pump system<br />
• Control hunting: As condensate backs up in the exchanger, the heat transfer rate to<br />
the process is greatly reduced. The control valve opens wide enough to allow flow<br />
into the exchanger. As condensate drains out, the steam space is now greater and<br />
the steam pressure increases. The process overheats, the control valve closes down,<br />
and the cycle repeats.<br />
• Temperature shock: Condensate backed up inside the steam space cools the tubes<br />
that carry the process fluid. When this sub-cooled condensate is suddenly replaced<br />
by hot steam due to poor steam trap operations, the expansion and contraction of<br />
the tubes stress the tube joints. Constantly repeating this cycle causes premature<br />
failure.<br />
• Corrosion from:<br />
1. Flooding - A flooded heat exchanger will permit the oxygen to dissolve, as well<br />
as carbon dioxide and other gases found in the steam. Because the condensate<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
120 10 Unresolved problems in the heat exchangers design<br />
is often sub-cooled due to the time it is in the exchanger, these gases are more<br />
readily dissolved. Together the cool condensate and dissolved gases are extremely<br />
corrosive and will tend to decrease the efficiency of the heat exchanger<br />
and reduce the heat transfer through the tubes.<br />
2. Steam collapse - Under very low loads with the steam valve closed, the steam<br />
volume collapses to smaller volume condensate, inducing a vacuum. When<br />
the vacuum breaker opens, atmospheric air and condensate mix inside the<br />
exchanger, increasing the possibility of corrosion of the tubes, shells, tube<br />
sheet and tube supports.<br />
3. Freezing - Steam/air coils cannot afford poor condensate drainage, especially<br />
if the coil experiences air below freezing temperature. Condensate backed up<br />
inside the coil will freeze, often within seconds, depending on the air temperature.<br />
A low temperature detection thermostat is recommended on the coil<br />
leaving side to sense freezing conditions. As we previously explained, the only<br />
way to avoid ”stall” is to eliminate back pressure on the steam trap. There are<br />
a number of options available for designing a system that greatly reduces the<br />
risk of ”stall.” The following are two such options:<br />
• Install the heat exchanger in a position so that the condensate freely drains by<br />
gravity to the condensate return line. In many cases this is not possible because<br />
of existing piping around the area in which the heat exchanger is needed (e.g., the<br />
heat exchanger is installed at a level lower than the condensate return tank).<br />
• Use an electric or pressure driven condensate pump package installed below the<br />
steam trap to pump condensate back to the boiler.<br />
In actual practice, the first option may not be possible, and so the use of electric or<br />
pressure driven pumps to return condensate to the boiler room should be considered.<br />
10 Unresolved problems in the heat exchangers design<br />
1. Accurate data on the thermodynamic properties: These are needed for both pure<br />
fluid and mixtures in single phase and two phase system under extremes conditions.<br />
It would be best if more predictable methods could be obtained<br />
2. fouling (predictive method not available)<br />
3. flow induced vibration (prediction)<br />
4. two phase flow (flow regime)<br />
5. boiling of mixture (heat transfer coefficient)<br />
6. turbulence (better understanding)<br />
10.1 Future trend<br />
1. Stepwise calculation of overall heat transfer coefficient instead of assumption<br />
2. Thermodynamic properties from built-in subroutines<br />
3. workshops fabrication drawings.<br />
4. better transportation facilities for the shell of heat exchanger.<br />
5. computer design code<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Bibliography 121<br />
Bibliography<br />
[1] Adunka, A.: Meßunsicherheiten ”Theorie und Praxis” 2.Auflage, VULKAN-Verlag,<br />
Essen, Germany, 2000<br />
[2] API RP 521. Guide for Pressure Relieving and Depressuring Systems. Washington<br />
D.C.: American Petroleum Institute. 1993<br />
[3] Baehr, H.D.; Stephan, K.: Waerme-und Stoffübertragung. (2ed), Springer, Berlin,<br />
1996<br />
[4] Baker, O.: <strong>Design</strong> of pipe lines for simultaneous flow of oil and gas. Oil and Gas J.,<br />
July 26. Bao, Z.Y., 1954<br />
[5] Bandel, J.: Druckverlust und Wärmeübergang bei der Verdampfung siedender<br />
Kältemilttel im durchströmten waagerechten Rohr. Dissertation, Universität Karlsruhe,<br />
Germany, 1973<br />
[6] Baumann, P.: Zur Thermohydraulik von Gas/Dampf-flüßigkeitsgemischen in horizontalen<br />
Rohren. Dissertation, Universitat Karlsruhe, Germany, 1993<br />
[7] Beattice, D.R.H.; Lawther, K.R.: An examination of wall temperature drop phenomenon<br />
during approach to flow boiling crisis. Proc. 8th Int. <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Conference,<br />
San Francisxo, USA, 1986<br />
[8] Bennet, D.L.; Chen, J.C.: Forced convective boiling in vertical tubes for saturated<br />
pure components and binary mixtures. AICHE Journal, Vol. 26, 1980, 454-461<br />
[9] Bertoletti, S.; Lombari, C.; Silvestri, M.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer to steam-water mixtures,<br />
C.I.S.E., Report R-78, 1964<br />
[10] Boissieux, X.; Heikel, M.R.; Johns, R.A.: Two-phase heat transfer coefficients of<br />
three HFC refrigerants inside a horizontal smooth tube, part I: Evaporation. Int. J.<br />
of Refrig., Vol. 23, 2000, 269-283<br />
[11] Bonilla, C.F.; Perry, C.W.: <strong>Heat</strong> transimission to boiling mixtures. Am. Inst. Chem.<br />
Eng. J., Vol. 37, 1941, 685-705<br />
[12] Bonn, W.: Wärmeübergang und Druckverlust bei der Verdampfung von Stickstoff<br />
und Argon in durchströmten horizontalen Rohr sowie Betrachtungen über die tangentialle<br />
Wärmeleitung und die maximal möglische Flüssigkeitsüberhitzung. Dissertation,<br />
Universität Karlsruhe (TH), Germany, 1980<br />
[13] Bonn, W.; Iwicki, J.; Krebs, R.; Steiner, D.; Schluender, E. U.: Über die Auswirkung<br />
der Ungleichverteilung des Wärmeübergangs am Rohrumfang bei der Verdampfung<br />
im durchströmten waagerechten Rohr. Wärme-und Stoffübertragung, 1980, 265-274<br />
[14] Branan, C. R.: Process Engineer’s Pocket Handbook, Vol. 1, Gulf Publishing Company,<br />
1976.<br />
[15] Butterworth, D.: “Condensors: basic heat transfer and fluids flow”, in Kakac, S.;<br />
Bergles, A.E.; Mayinger, F. (eds): <strong>Heat</strong> exchangers. Hemisphere publishing Corp.,<br />
New York, USA, 1981, 289-314<br />
[16] Calus, W.F.; di Montegnacco, A.; Denning, R.K.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer in a natural circulation<br />
single tube reboiler, part II: Binary liquid mixtures. Chem. Eng. J., Vol. 6,<br />
1973, 251-264<br />
[17] Calus, W.F.; Leonidopoulos, D.J.:Pool boiling-binary liquid mixtures. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong><br />
and Mass Transfer, Vol. 17, 1974, 249-256<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
122 Bibliography<br />
[18] Carey, V.P.: Liquid-vapor-phase-change phenomina: An introduction to the thermophysics<br />
of vaporization and condensation processes in heat transfer equipment.<br />
Tayler and Francis, Bristol, UK, 1992<br />
[19] Chen, J.C.: Correlation for boiling heat transfer to saturated fluids in convective<br />
flow. I and EC Process <strong>Design</strong> and Development, Vol. 5, 1966, 322-29<br />
[20] Chen, M.M.: An analytical study of laminar film condensation : Part 1-Flat plates<br />
and part 2-Multiple horizontal tubes. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer, Vol. 83, 1961, 48-54, 55-60<br />
[21] Chen, L.-T.; Huang, F.; Rong-Fung, M.: Boiling heat transfer to R22/DMF mixtures.<br />
Int. Comm. <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 12, 1985, 541-549<br />
[22] Chisholm, D.: Pressure gradients due to friction during the flow of evaporating two<br />
phase mixtures in smooth tubes and channels. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer,<br />
Vol. 16, 1973, 374-358<br />
[23] Churchil, S.W.; Chu, H.H.S.: Correlation equations for laminar and turbulent free<br />
convection from a vertical plate. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 18, 1975,<br />
1323-1329<br />
[24] Chwala, J.M.: Wärmeübergang und Druckabfall in waagerechten Rohren bei der<br />
Strömung von verdampfenden Kältemitteln. VDI-Forschungsheft Nr. 523, VDI-<br />
Verlag GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany, 1967<br />
[25] Collier, J.G.; Thome, J.R. (ed): Convective boiling and condensation. 3rd ed.,<br />
Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK, 1994<br />
[26] Collier, J.G.: Gas-liquid flow, in: heat exchanger design handbook. Vol. 2. Hemisphere,<br />
Washington, DC, USA, 1983<br />
[27] Cooper, M.G.: Saturation nucleate pool boiling, A simple correlation. 1st UK National<br />
Conference on <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer, Vol. 2, 1984, 785-793<br />
[28] Costigan, G.; Frankum, D.P.; Wadekar, V.V.: Flow boiling measurements on pentane,<br />
iso-octane and pentane/iso-octane mixtures. Proc. 10th Int. <strong>Heat</strong> Tranafer<br />
Coeference,Brighton, UK, Vol. 7, 1994,431-436<br />
[29] Coulson and Richardson’s chemical engineering volume 6 (3rd ed). Butterworth and<br />
heinemann, Oxford, 1999<br />
[30] Dembi, et al.: in Aumann, L.: Verfahren zur Berechnung lokaler<br />
Wärmeübergangkoeffizienten von Zweiphasenströmungen in Rohren. Studienarbeit,<br />
Institut für Thermodynamik, Universität Hannover, Germany, 1998.<br />
[31] Der Deutsche Kalibrierdienst (DKD): Ermittlung von Meßunsicherheiten (DKD-3).<br />
Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstlt, Braunschweig, 1991<br />
[32] Didion, D.A.; Bivens, D.B.: Role of refrigerant mixtures as alternative to CFCs.<br />
Int. J. of Refrig., Vol. 13, 1990, 163-175<br />
[33] Dittus, F.W.; Boelter, L.M.K.: University of California (Berkeley) Publications on<br />
Engineering, Vol. 2, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1930, 443<br />
[34] Domanski, P.A.; Didion, D. A.: Thermodynamic evaluation of R-22 alternative<br />
refrigerants and refrigerant mixtures. ASHRAE Trans., Vol. 99, Part 2, 1993, 636-<br />
648<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Bibliography 123<br />
[35] Eckels, S.J.; Doerr, T.M.; Pate, M.B.: In-tube heat transfer and pressure drop of<br />
R-134a and Ester lubricant mixtures in a smooth tube and a micro-fin tube: Part<br />
I-Evaporation. ASHRAE Trans., Vol. 100, 1994, 265-282<br />
[36] Eckels, S.J.; Doerr, T.M.; Pate, M.B.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient and pressure drop<br />
for R-134a and an Ester lubricant mixture in a smooth tube and micro fin tube.<br />
ASHRAE Trans., Vol. 104, 1998, 366-375<br />
[37] Eckels, S.J.; Doerr, T.M.; Pate, M.B.: A comparison of the heat transfer and<br />
pressure drop for R-134a and lubricant mixture in different diameter smooth tubes<br />
and nicro fin tubes. ASHRAE Trans., Vol. 104, Part A, 1998, 376-386<br />
[38] Eckels, S.J.; Pate, M.B.: An experimental comparison of evaporation and condensation<br />
heat transfer coefficients for HFC-134a and CFC-12. Int. J. Refrig., Vol. 14,<br />
March, 1991, 70-78<br />
[39] Emhart (1969), <strong>Heat</strong> Exchanger Tube-to-Tubesheet Joints, ASME Pap. 69-WA/HT-<br />
47.<br />
[40] Fenghour et al.: Transport properties of ammonia. Int. J. Chem. Phys. Ref. Data,<br />
Vol. 24, No. 5, 1995, 1649-67<br />
[41] Fletcher, D.F.; Haynes, B.S.: An experimental study of gas-liquid flow in a narrow<br />
conduit. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Hass Transfer, Vol. 43, 2000, 2313-24<br />
[42] Friedel, L.: Momentum exchange and pressure drop in two-phase flow. Proceeding<br />
NATO Advanced Study Institute, Istanbul, Turkey, 16-17 August, Vol. I, 1976,<br />
239-312<br />
[43] Fuchs, P.H.: Influence of the tube material and external heat load on heat transfer<br />
coefficient with separated flow in evaporator. Proc. of the 16th Int. Congr. of Refrig.,<br />
Venedig, Vol. 2, 1987, 503-506<br />
[44] Fujita, Y.; Bai, Q.: Bubble dynamics and heat transfer in mixture boiling. Proceeding<br />
of the 12th Int. <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Conference, Gernoble, France, Vol. 1, 2002,<br />
93-104<br />
[45] Fujii, T.; Uehara, H.; Kurata, C.: Laminar filmwise condensation of flowing vapor<br />
on a horizontal cylinder. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 15, 1972, 235-246<br />
[46] Gnielinski, V.: New equation for heat and mass transfer in turbulent pipe and<br />
channel flow. Int. J. Chemical Engineering, Vol. 16, 1976, 359-368<br />
[47] Gorenflo, D.; Bieling, V.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer at pool boiling of mixtures with R22 and<br />
R115. XVII Int. Symp. on <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer in Cryoeng and Refrig., 1986,<br />
243-257<br />
[48] Goebel, O.: Modeling of two phase stratified and annular flow in heated horitontal<br />
tubes. In: Mayinger, F.; Lehner, M.: Convective flow and pool boiling. Taylor and<br />
Francis, Philadelphia, USA, 1999<br />
[49] Granryd, E.: Hydrocarbons as refrigerants- an overview. Internationl J. of Refrig.,<br />
Vol. 24, 2001, 15-24<br />
[50] Gropp, U.:Wärme- und Stoffübertragung bei Oberflächen Verdampfung und beim<br />
Blasensieden eines Binäres Gemisches am Riesenfilm. Dissertation, Universität Karlsruhe<br />
(TU), Germany, 1989<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
124 Bibliography<br />
[51] Gross, U.; Song, Y.W.; Hahne, E.: Thermal conductivity of the new refrigerants<br />
R134a, R152a and R123 measured by transient hot-wire method. Int. J. of Thermodynamics,<br />
Vol. 13, No. 6, 1992, 957-983<br />
[52] Gungor, K.E.; Winterton, R.H.S.: General correlation for flow boiling in tubes and<br />
annuli. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 26, 1986, 351-358<br />
[53] Hambraeus, K.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient during two-phase flow boiling of HFC-134a.<br />
Int. J. Refrig, Vol. 14, No. Nov.,1991, 357-362<br />
[54] Hashizume, K.: Flow pattern and void fraction of refrigerant two-phase flow in a<br />
horizontal pipe. Bulletin of the JSME, Vol. 26, No. 219, 1983, 1597-1602<br />
[55] Herbst, K.E.; Fechner, A.; Köhler, W.; Goebel, O.; Oberle, B.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer behavior<br />
of an absorber tube with direct steam generation by water injection. In: Chen,<br />
J.C. (ed). Convective flow boiling. Taylor & Francis, 1996<br />
[56] Hewitt, G.F.; Kearcy, H.A.; Lacey, P.M.C.: Burn-out and nucleation in climbing<br />
film flow. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 8, 1965, 793-814<br />
[57] Hihara, E.; Tanida, K.; Saito, T.: Forced convection boiling experiments of binary<br />
mixtures. Proc. of the ASME-JSME Thermal Engineering joint Conf., Honolulu,<br />
Publ. by ASME, Vol 5, 1989, 119-126<br />
[58] Holcomb, C.D.; Magee, J,W.; Scott, J.L.; Outcalt, S.L.; Haynes, W.M.: Selected<br />
thermodynamic properties for mixtures of R-32 (Difluoromethane), R125 (pentafluoroethane),<br />
R134a (1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane), R143a (1,1,1-trifluoroethane),<br />
R41(fluoroethane), propane (R290), and R744 (carbon dioxide). NIST Technical<br />
Note No. 1397, U.S. Dept. Commerce, Washington, 1997<br />
[59] ICI: Physikalische Eigenschaften von Klea 134a SI-Einheiten. Mitteilung der Fa.<br />
Deutsche ICI GmbH, Frankfurt, Germany, 1993<br />
[60] Jain, V.K.; Dhar, P.L.: Studies on flow boiling of mixture of refrigerants R12 and<br />
R13 inside a horizontal tube. Proc. XVI, Int. Congr. Refrig., Paris, 1983<br />
[61] Jallouk, P.A.: Two phase flow pressure drop and heat transfer characteristics of<br />
refrigerants in vertical tube. PhD-thesis, University of Tennessee, 1974<br />
[62] Jensen, M. K.; Bensler, H.P.: Saturated forced convection boiling heat transfer with<br />
twisted tape inserts. ASME J. <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer, Vol. 108, 1986, 93-99<br />
[63] Jung, D.S.: Horizontal flow boiling heat transfer using refrigerant mixture. PhDthesis,<br />
University of Maryland, 1988<br />
[64] Jung, D.S.; McLinden, M.; Radermacher, R.; Didion, D.: Horizontal flow boiling<br />
heat transfer experiments with a mixture of R22/R114. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass<br />
Transfer, Vol. 32, 1989, 131-145<br />
[65] Jung, D.S.; Radermacher, R.: Prediction of evaporation heat transfer coefficient and<br />
pressure drop of refrigerant mixtures. Int. J. Refrig., Vol. 16, No. 5, 1993, 330-338<br />
[66] Jung, D.; Song, Y.; Park, B.: Performance des melanges de frigorigenes utilises pour<br />
remplacer le HCFC22. Int. J. of Refrig., Vol. 23, 2000, 466-474<br />
[67] Kabelac, S.; de Buhr, H-J.: Flow boiling of ammonia in a plain and low finned<br />
horizontal tube. Int. J. of Refrig., Vol. 24, 2001, 41-50<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Bibliography 125<br />
[68] Kabelac, S.; de Buhr, H.-J.: Flow boiling of ammonia and ammonia -oil mixtures<br />
in a plain and a low finned horizontal tube. Proc. 34th National <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer<br />
Conference, 2000,1-8<br />
[69] Kabelac, S.; Rabah, R.: Flow boiling of R134a-propane mixtures: -experiments and<br />
CML modeling-. Proc. of the 12th. Int. <strong>Heat</strong> Tranasfer Conference, Grenoble, Vol.<br />
4, 2002, 525-530<br />
[70] Kandlikar S.G.: A general correlation for two-phase flow boiling heat transfer inside<br />
horizontal and vertical tubes. Int. J. <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 112, 1990, 219-228<br />
[71] Kandlikar, S.G.: Boiling heat transfer with binary mixtures: Part II- Flow boiling<br />
in plain tubes. Transaction of ASME, Vol. 120, 1998, 388-394<br />
[72] Kandlikar, S.G.: Boiling <strong>Heat</strong> transfer with binary mixtures: Part I- A theoretical<br />
model for pool boiling. Transaction of ASME, vol. 120, 1998, 380-387<br />
[73] Kandlikar, S.G.; Shoji, M. ; Dhir, V. (ed): Hand Book of Phase Change: Boiling<br />
and Condensation. Taylor & Francis, Philadelphia, 1999<br />
[74] Kapitza, P.L.: Wave flow of thin viscous fluids. Zh. Eksp. Teoret. Fitz., Vol. 18,<br />
1948, 1-1<br />
[75] Kattan, N.; Thome, J.R.; Favrat, D.: Flow boiling in horizontal tubes. Part 1-<br />
Developmment of adiabatic two phase flow pattern map. Trans. of ASME, Vol. 120,<br />
1998, 140-147<br />
[76] Kattan, N.; Thome, J.R.; Favrat D.: Flow boiling in horizontal tubes. Part 2-New<br />
heat transfer data for five refrigerants. ASHRAE Trans., Vol. 120, 1998, 148-155.<br />
[77] Kattan, N.; Thome, J.R.; Favrat D.: Flow boiling in horizontal tubes. Part 3-<br />
Development of a new heat transfer model based on flow pattern map. ASHRAE<br />
Trans., Vol. 120, 1998, 156-165<br />
[78] Kenning, D. B.R.; Cooper, M. G.: Saturated flow boiling of water in vertical tubes.<br />
Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 31, 1988, 455-458.<br />
[79] Kern, D. Q.: Process <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer, McGraw-Hill, 1950.<br />
[80] Khanpara, J.C.: Augmentation of in tube evaporation and condensation with microfin<br />
tubes. PhD-thesis, Iowa State University, Ames, IA, 1986<br />
[81] Kim, M.S.; Mulroy, W.J; Didon, D.A.: Performance evaluation of two azeotropic<br />
refrigerant mixtures of HFC-134a with R-290 (propane) and R-600 (isobutane).<br />
Trans. of the ASME, Vol. 116, June, 1994, 148-154<br />
[82] Kleemiß, M.: Thermodynamische Eigenschaften zweir ternärer Kältemittelgemische.<br />
Dissertation, Universität Hannover, Germany,1997<br />
[83] Kleiber, M.: Vapor-liquid equilibria of binary refrigerant mixtures containing propylene<br />
or R134a. Fluid Phase Equil. Vol. 92, 1994, 149-194<br />
[84] Klimenko, in: Aumann, L.: Verfahren zur Berechnung lokaler Wärmeübergangkoeffizient<br />
von Zweiphasenströmungen in Rohren. Studienarbeit, Institut für Thermodynamik,<br />
Universität Hannover, Germany, 1998.<br />
[85] Koh, C.Y.; Sparrow, E.M.; Harnett, J.P.: The two phase boundary layer in laminar<br />
film condensation. Int. J. <strong>Heat</strong> Mass Transfer, Vol. 2, 1961, 69-82.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
126 Bibliography<br />
[86] Köhler, W.; Kefer, V.; Kastner, W.: Bestimmung des Wärmeübergangs im unbenetzen<br />
Teil von Verdampferrohren unter Berücksichtigung zweidimensionaler<br />
Wärmeleitung in Wandmaterial. Wärme-Stoffübertragung, Vol. 21, 1987, 133-138<br />
[87] Kohler, J.1991. Cold Box Explosion at Shell Steam Cracker in Berre, France. Paper<br />
presented at AIChE Spring National Meeting, Houston, Texas.<br />
[88] Kon’kov, A.S.: Experimental study of the conditions under which heat exchanger<br />
deteriorates when a steam-water mixture flows in heated tubes. Teploenergetika,<br />
Vol. 13, No. 12, 1965, 77<br />
[89] Lee, W.C.; Rabbar, S.; Rose, J.W.: Film condensation of refrigerant R113 and<br />
ethanediol on a horizontal tube- effect of vapour velocity. ASME J. <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer,<br />
Vol. 106, 1984, 524-530<br />
[90] Liu, Z.; Winterton, R.H.S,: A general correlation for saturated and subcooled flow<br />
boiling in tubes and annuli based on a nucleate pool boiling equation. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong><br />
and Mass Transfer, Vol. 34, No. 8, 1990, 2759-2766<br />
[91] Lockhart, R.W.; Martinelli, R.C.: Proposed correaltion for data for two-phase, twocomponent<br />
flow in pipes. Chem. Eng. Prog. Vol. 45, 1949, 39-48<br />
[92] Lucas, K.; Luckas, M.: Berechnungsmethoden für Stoffeigenschaften. VDI-<br />
Wärmeatlas. 8. Auflage, Springer, Berlin, 1997<br />
[93] Ludwig, E. E.: Applied Process <strong>Design</strong> for Chemical and Petrochemical Plants, Vol.<br />
3, 3rd edition, Gulf Publishing Company, 1998.<br />
[94] Mathur, G.D.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient for propane (R-290), isobutane (R-600a),<br />
and 50/50 mixture of propane and isobutane. ASHRAE Transaction, Vol. 104, No.<br />
2, 1998, 1159-1172<br />
[95] McAdams, W.H.; Woods, W. K.; Heroman, L.C.: Vaporization inside horizontal<br />
tube-II, Benzene oil mixtures. Trans. ASME, Vol. 64, 1972, 193-193<br />
[96] McLinden, M.O.: Measurement and formulation of the thermodynamic properties<br />
of refrigerants R134a, R123. ASHRAE trans., Vol. 95, No. 2, 1989, 79-103<br />
[97] Melin, P.; Vamling, L.: Flow boiling heat transfer and pressure drop for HFC-134a<br />
in a horizontal tube. Proc. of meetings of commissions B1, B2, E1, E2, Padoua,<br />
1994, 575-582<br />
[98] Memory, S.B.; Rose, J.W.: Free convection laminar film condensation on a horizontal<br />
tube with variable wall temperature. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer. Vol. 34,<br />
No. 11, 1991, 2775-2778.<br />
[99] Moldover, M.R.; Trusler, J.P.M.; Edwards, T.J.; Mehl, J.B.; Davis, R.S.: Measurement<br />
of the universal gas consatnat R using a spherical acoustic resonator. J.<br />
Research NBS, Vol. 93, No. 2, 1988, 85<br />
[100] Morrison, G; McLinden, M.O.: Azeotropy in refrigerant mixture. Rev. Int. Froid.,<br />
Vol. 16, No. 2, 1993, 129-137<br />
[101] Müller-Steinhagen, H.: Wärmeübergang und Fouling beim Strömungssieden von<br />
Argon und Stickstoff im horizontalen Rohr. Fortschritt-Berichte VDI- Reihe 6 Nr.<br />
143, VDI-Verlag GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany, 1991<br />
[102] Müller-Steinhagen, H.; Schlünder, E.U.: Über den Einfluß des Wärmeleitvermögens<br />
der Rohrwand auf den umfangsmittelen Wärmeübergangs-koeffizienten beim Sieden<br />
in horizontalen Verdampferrohren. Chem. Eng. Process, Vol. 18, 1984, 303-316<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Bibliography 127<br />
[103] Murata, K.; Hashizume, K.: Forced convection boiling of non-azeotropic refrigerant<br />
mixtures inside tubes. ASME J. of <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer, Vol. 115, 1993, 680-689<br />
[104] Murata, K.; Hashizume, K.: An experimental invistigation on forced convection<br />
boiling of nonazeotropic refrigerant mixtures. <strong>Heat</strong> transfer Jpn. Res., Vol. 19, No.<br />
2, 1990, 95-109<br />
[105] Niederkrüger, M.: Strömungssieden von reinen Stoffen und binären zeotropen<br />
Gemischen im waagerechten Rohr bei mittleren und hohen Drücken. Fortschritt-<br />
Berichte VDI- Reihe 3, Nr. 245, VDI-Verlag GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany, 1991<br />
[106] Niederkrüger, M.; Steiner, D.; Schluender, E.-U.: Horizotal flow boiling experiments<br />
of saturated pure components and mixtures of R846-R12 at high pressure. Int. J.<br />
Refrig., Vol. 15, No. 1, 1992, 48-58<br />
[107] Niederkrüger, M.; Steiner, D.: Flow boiling heat transfer to saturated pure components<br />
and non-azeotropic mixtures in a horizontal tube. Chemical Engineering and<br />
Processing, Vol. 33, 1994, 261-274<br />
[108] NIST: REFRPOP. National institute for science and technology. Washington, DC,<br />
1995<br />
[109] Nusselt, W.: Die Oberflächenkondensation des Wasserdampfes. VDI-Z. 60, 1916,<br />
541-546, 569-575<br />
[110] Okubo, T.; Hasuo, T.; Nagashima, H.A.: Measurement of viscosity of HFC 134a in<br />
the temperature range 213-423 K and at pressure up to 30 MPa. Int. J. of Thermodynamics,<br />
Vol. 13, No. 6, 1992, 931-942<br />
[111] Palen, J.W.: Falling film evaporation of wide-boiling-range mixtures inside a vertical<br />
tube. PhD-thesis, Lehigh Univ., 1988<br />
[112] Perry, R.H.; Green, D.W.: Perry’s chemical engineers’ hand book. 16th (ed), Mc-<br />
Graw Hill, New York, 1984<br />
[113] Perry, R. H., Green, D. W. (Eds.): Perry’s Chemical Engineers’ Handbook, 7th<br />
edition, McGraw-Hill, 1997 , Section 11.<br />
[114] Petukhov, B.S.; Popov, V.N.: Theoretical calculation of the heat exchanger and frictional<br />
resistance in turbulent flow in tubes of an incompressible fluid with variable<br />
physical properties. teplofiz. Vysok. temperatur (High temperature heat physics)<br />
Vol. 1, No. 1, 1963<br />
[115] Price, J. H. 1989. Personal communication to T.W. Carmody, Director CCPS.<br />
[116] Price, J. H. 1989. Personal communication to T.W. Carmody, Director CCPS.<br />
[117] Rauhani, S.Z.: Subcooled void fraction. AB Atomenergie (Sweden) Report AE-<br />
RTV 841, 1969<br />
[118] Reid, R.C.; Prausnitz, J. M.; Poling, B. E.: The properties of gases and liquids.<br />
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1987<br />
[119] Reynolds, Tube Welding for Conventional and Nuclear Power Plant <strong>Heat</strong> <strong>Exchangers</strong>,<br />
ASME Pap. 69-WA/HT-24, 1969<br />
[120] Rohlin, P.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient of zeotropic mixtures and their pure components<br />
in horizontal flow boiling -an experimental study. Proceedings of 1997 ASME<br />
International Mechanical Engineering Congress and Exposition, Dallas, USA, 1997<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
128 Bibliography<br />
[121] Rohsenow, W.M.; Hartnett, J.P.; Cho, Y.I.: Hand Book of <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer. McGraw-<br />
Hill, New York, 1998<br />
[122] Rose, J.W.: Effect of pressure gradient in forced convection film condensation on a<br />
horizontal tube. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 27, No. 1, 1984, 39-47<br />
[123] Rose, J.W.: Condensation heat transfer fundamental. Trans. IchemE, Vol.76, part<br />
A, 1998, 143-152<br />
[124] Rose, J.W.: Fundamental of condensation heat transfer: Laminar film condensation.<br />
JSME Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Series II, Vol. 31, No. 3, 1988, 357-375<br />
[125] Ross, H.D.; Radermacher, R.; Di Marzo, M.; Didion, D.: Horizontal flow boiling of<br />
pure and mixed refrigerants. Int. J. <strong>Heat</strong> Mass Transfer, Vol. 30, 1987, 979-992<br />
[126] Schlünder, E.U.: Über den Wärmeübergang bei der Blasenverdampfung von Gemischen.<br />
vt Verfahrenstechnik, Vol. 16, No. 9, 1982, 692-698<br />
[127] Schluender, E. U. (Ed.): VDI <strong>Heat</strong> Atlas, Woodhead Publishing, Limited, 1993,<br />
Chapter Cc.<br />
[128] Schmidt, H.: Beitrag zum Verständnis des Wärmeübergangs im horizontalen<br />
Verdampferrohr. Fortschritt-Berichte VDI- Reihe 19, No. 6, VDI-Verlag GmbH,<br />
Düsseldorf, Germany, 1986<br />
[129] Schrock, V.E.; Grossman, L. M.: Forced convection in tubes. Nuclear Science and<br />
Engineering, Vol. 12, 1962, 474-481<br />
[130] Shah, M.M.: A new correlation for heat transfer during boiling flow through pipes.<br />
ASHREE Trans., Vol. 82, 1976, 66-86<br />
[131] Shah, M.M.: Prediction of heat transfer during boiling of cryogenic fluids flowing<br />
in tubes. Cryogenics, Vol. 5, 1984, 231-236.<br />
[132] Shah, M.M.: Chart correlation for saturated boiling heat transfer: Equation and<br />
further studies. ASHREE Trans. Vol. 88, No. 1, 1982, 80-89<br />
[133] Shao, D.W.; Granryd, E.: Experimental and theoretical study on flow condensation<br />
with non-azeotropic refrigerant mixtures of R32/R134a. Int. J. Refrig. Vol. 21, No.<br />
3, 1998, 230-246<br />
[134] Shekriladze, I.G.: Gomelauri, V.I.: Theoretical study of laminar film condensation<br />
of flowing vapor. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer. Vol.9, 1966, 581-1<br />
[135] Shin, J.Y.; Kim, M.S.; Ro, S.T.: Experimental study on forced convective boiling<br />
heat transfer of pure and refrigerant mixtures in a horizontal tube. Int. J. of Refrig.,<br />
Vol. 20, No. 4, 1997, 267-275<br />
[136] Shoji, M.: Boiling simulator- a simple theoretical model of boiling-. Proc. of the 3rd<br />
Int. Conf. on Multiphase Flow, Lyon, France, June 1998, 8-12<br />
[137] Singal, L.C.; Sharma, C.P.; Varma, H.K.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer correlation for the forced<br />
convection boiling of R12/R13 mixture. Int. J. Refrig., Vol. 7, No. 5, 1984, 278-284<br />
[138] Sparrow, E.M.; Gregg, J.L.: A boundray-layer treatment of laminar film condensation.<br />
J. <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer, No. 81C, 1959, 13-18,<br />
[139] Spindler, K.: Flow boiling. Proc. Int. <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Conference, Brighton, UK, Vol.<br />
1, 1994, 349-369<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
Bibliography 129<br />
[140] Steiner, D.: Strömungssieden Gesättiger Flüssigkeiten. in: VDI, VDI-GVC: VDI-<br />
Wärmeatlas. 8. Aufl., Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1997, Abschnitt, Dbb<br />
[141] Stephan, K.: Two-phase heat exchange for new refrigerants and their mixtures. Int.<br />
J. Refrig., Vol. 18, No. 3, 1995, 198-209<br />
[142] Stephan, K.; Korner, M.: Berechnung des Warmeübergangs verdampfender binärer<br />
Flüßigkeitsgemische. Chem. Ing. Tech., Vol. 2, 1969, 161-169<br />
[143] Stephan, K.; Preusser, P.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer and critical heat flux in pool boiling of<br />
binary and ternary mixtures. German Chem. engng, Vol. 2, 1979, 161-169<br />
[144] Storek, H.; Brauer, H.: Reibungsdruckverlust der adiabaten Gas/Flüßigkeitsstömung<br />
in horizontalen und vertikalen Rohren. VDI-Forschungsheft, Nr. 599, VDI-<br />
Verlag GmbH, Düsseldorf, Germany, 1980<br />
[145] Taitel, Y.; Dukler, A.E.: A model for predicting flow regime transitions in horizontal<br />
and near horizontal Gas-Liquid flow. AICHE J., Vol. 22, No. 2, 1985, 43-55<br />
[146] In: <strong>Heat</strong> exchanger design handbook, New York: Hemisphere, Volo. 1, section 1.5<br />
[147] Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, ”Standards of the Tubular Exchanger<br />
Manufacturers Association,” 7th ed., TEMA, New York (1988).<br />
[148] Thome, J. R.: Prediction of binary mixture boiling heat transfer coefficient using<br />
only phase equilibrium data. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer, Vol. 26, 1983, 965-<br />
974<br />
[149] Thome, J. R.: Enhanced boiling of mixture. Chemical Engineering Service, Vol. 42,<br />
No. 8, 1986, 1909-1917<br />
[150] Tillner-Roth, R.: Die thermodynamischen Eigenschaften von R152a, R134a und<br />
ihren Gemischen-Messungen und Fundamental Gleichungen. Dissertation, Universität<br />
Hannover; Germany, 1993<br />
[151] Tillner-Roth, R.: Fundamental equations of state. Shaker-Verlag, Aachen, Germany,<br />
1998<br />
[152] Tillner-Roth, R.; Baehr, H.D.: An international standard formulation of the thermodynamic<br />
properties of 1,1,1,2-tetraflouroethane (HFC-134a) covering temperatures<br />
from 170 K to 455 K at pressure up to 70 MPa. J. Phys. Chem. Ref. data., Vol. 23,<br />
1994, 657<br />
[153] Tillner-Roth, R.; Li, J.; Yokozenki, A.; Sato, H.; Watanabe, K.: Thermodynamic<br />
properties of pure and blended Hydroflourocarbons (HFCs) Refrigerants. Japan<br />
Society of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, 1997<br />
[154] Urso, M.E.; Wadekar, V.V; Hewitt, G.F.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer at the dryout and near<br />
dryout regions in flow boiling. 12. Proc. of the 12. Int. <strong>Heat</strong> Tranasfer Conference,<br />
Grenoble, Vol.3. 2002, 701-706.<br />
[155] van Wijk, W.R.; Vos, A.S.; van Stralen, S.J.D.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer to boiling binary<br />
liquid mixtures. Chem. Engng. Sci., Vol. 5, 1956, 68-80<br />
[156] Verma, H.K.; Sharma, C.P.; Mishra, M.P.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficients during forced<br />
convective evaporation of R12 and R22 mixtures in annular flow regime. Proc. XV<br />
Int. Congr. Refrig., Vol. II, 1979, 479-484<br />
[157] VDI, VDI-GVC: VDI- Wärmeatlas. 8. Aufl., Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1997<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
130 Bibliography<br />
[158] Viera, G. A., L. L. Simpson and B. C. Ream 1993. Lessons Learned from the Ethylene<br />
Oxide Explosion at Seadrift, Texas, Chemical Engineering Progress, August<br />
1993.<br />
[159] Voskresenskji, K.D.: <strong>Heat</strong> transfer in film condensation with temperature dependent<br />
properties of the condensate. Izv. Akad. Nauk. USSR, 1948, 1023-1028<br />
[160] Wadekar, V.V.: Convective heat transfer to binary mixtures in annular two-phase<br />
flow. Proc. of the 10th Int. <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Conference, Brington, Vol. 7, 1994, 557-562<br />
[161] Wadekar, V.V.: Boiling hot issues-some resolved and some not-yet-resolved. Trans.<br />
IchemE., Vol. 76, Part A, 1998, 133-142<br />
[162] Weisman, J.; Duncan, D.; Bibson, J.; Crawford, T.: Effect of fluid properties and<br />
pipe diameter on two phase flow pattern in horizontal pipelines. Int. J. Multiphase<br />
flow, Vol. 5, 1979, 437-462<br />
[163] Wettermann, M.: Wärmeübergang beim Sieden von Gemischen bei Zwangskonvektion<br />
im horizontalen Verdampferrhor. Fortschritt-Berichte VDI- Reihe 3, Nr. 625,<br />
VDI-Verlag GmbH, Düsseldorf, 1999<br />
[164] Wongwises, S.; Disawas, S.; Kaewon, J; Onuari, C.: Two-phase evaporative heat<br />
transfer coefficients of refrigerant HFC-134a under forced flow conditions in a small<br />
horizotal tube. Int. Comm. <strong>Heat</strong> Mass Transfer, Vol. 27, No. 1, 2000, 35-48<br />
[165] Yan, Y.; Lin, T.: Evaporation heat transfer and pressure drop of refrigerant R134a<br />
in small pipe. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Transfer. Vol. 41, 1997, 4183-4194<br />
[166] Younglove, B.A.; Ely, J.F.: Thermophysical properties of fluids: Methane, Ethane,<br />
Propane, Isobutane and Normal Butane. J. of Physical Chemical Reference data,<br />
Vol. 16, No. 4, 1987, 577-798<br />
[167] Zahn, W.R.: Flow conditions when evaporating refrigerant R22 in air conditioning<br />
coils. ASHRAE trans., Vol. 72, 1965, 82-89<br />
[168] Zhang, L.; Hihara, E.; Saito, T.; Oh, J.-T.: Boiling heat transfer of a ternary refrigerant<br />
mixture inside a horizontal smooth tube. Int. J. of <strong>Heat</strong> and Mass Treansfer,<br />
Vol. 40, No. 9, 1997, 2009-2017<br />
[169] Zürcher, O.; Thome, J.R.; Favrat, D.: In tube flow boiling of R407C and R407C/oil<br />
mixtures. Part I: microfin tube. ASHRAE Trans., Vol. 4, No. 4, 1998, 347-372<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
A.1 Single phase<br />
A.1.1 Inside tube: Turbulent flow<br />
where<br />
Nu = CRe a P r b<br />
µ<br />
µw<br />
c<br />
131<br />
, (A.1)<br />
Nu = hde<br />
P r =<br />
k Nusselt number<br />
Cpµ<br />
Re<br />
de<br />
A<br />
k<br />
ρud<br />
µ<br />
4A<br />
P<br />
Prandtl number<br />
Reynolds number<br />
hydraulic diameter<br />
cross-sectional area<br />
P wetted perimeter<br />
u fluid velocity<br />
µw fluid viscosity at the tube wall temperature<br />
k fluid thermal conductivity<br />
fluid specific heat<br />
Cp<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
C =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
A.1.2 Inside tube: Laminar flow<br />
A.1.3 Shell side<br />
0.021 gases<br />
0.023 non-viscous liquid<br />
0.027 viscous liquid<br />
a = 0.8<br />
b = 0.3 for cooling<br />
b = 0.4 for heating<br />
c = 0.14<br />
<br />
Nu = 1.86 ReP r d<br />
1/3 0.14 µ<br />
, (A.2)<br />
L µw<br />
For the shell side heat transfer coefficient there are a number of methods the include:<br />
• Kern’s method<br />
• Donohue’s method<br />
• Bell-Delaware method<br />
• Tinker’s method<br />
Besides these methods there is some proprietary methods putout by various organization<br />
for use by their member companies. A number of these method are based on one of the<br />
above methods. Some are based upon a judicious combination of methods 3 and 4 above<br />
and supplemented by further research data. Among the most popular of the proprietary<br />
methods, judged by their large clientele are<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
132 A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer Research Inc. (HTRI), Alliambra, california. This method is also<br />
known as stream analysis method.<br />
• <strong>Heat</strong> Transfer and Fluid Flow Service (HTFS), Engineering Science Division, AERE,<br />
Harwell, United Kingdom Method.<br />
In this work only Kern’s method is given below. Bell-Delaware method may be found in<br />
Coulson and Richardson’s<br />
where<br />
Nu = 0.36Re 0.55 P r 1/3<br />
µ<br />
µw<br />
0.14<br />
, (A.3)<br />
Nu = hde<br />
P r =<br />
k Nusselt number<br />
Cpµ<br />
Re =<br />
k Prandtl number<br />
Gde<br />
de =<br />
µ Reynolds number<br />
4A<br />
A =<br />
P hydraulic diameter<br />
cross-sectional flow area<br />
P = wetted perimeter<br />
G =<br />
As =<br />
M<br />
As<br />
Mass flux<br />
(pt−do)DslB<br />
pt<br />
fluid viscosity at the tube wall temperature<br />
pt = pitch diameter<br />
Ds = shell diameter<br />
lB = Baffle spacing<br />
Hydraulic diameter (Fig. A.1)<br />
d o<br />
Square pitch<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
de =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
p 2 t −πd2 o/4<br />
πdo<br />
0.87p 2 t /2−πd2 o/8<br />
πdo/2<br />
p t<br />
for square pitch<br />
for equilateral triangular pitch<br />
p t<br />
Equilateral triangular pitch<br />
Figure A.1. Tube arrangement<br />
A s<br />
Cross-flow area<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
A.2 Condensation 133<br />
A.1.4 Plate heat exchanger<br />
where<br />
Nu = 0.26Re 0.65 P r 0.4<br />
µ<br />
µw<br />
0.14<br />
, (A.4)<br />
Nu = hde<br />
P r =<br />
= k Nusselt number<br />
Cpµ<br />
Re =<br />
= k Prandtl number<br />
ρupde Gde = µ µ = Reynolds number<br />
de = hydraulic diameter, taken as twice the gap between the plates<br />
A = cross-sectional flow area<br />
P = wetted perimeter<br />
G =<br />
Af =<br />
M<br />
Af<br />
= Mass flux<br />
cross-sectional area for flow<br />
up = channel velocity<br />
M = mass flow rate<br />
A.2 Condensation<br />
A.2.1 Condensation on vertical plate or outside vertical tube<br />
where<br />
hm = 0.943<br />
<br />
3 1/4<br />
k ρ∆ρgλ<br />
µ∆T L<br />
, (A.5)<br />
hm = mean heat transfer coefficient<br />
L = lenth of the plate or the vetical tube<br />
k thermal conductivity of the saturated liquid film<br />
ρ = liquid density<br />
µ = liquid viscosity<br />
λ = latent heat of evaporization<br />
∆T = Ts − Tw temperature difference across the condensate film<br />
g = acceleration due to gravity<br />
Ts = saturation temperature of the condensate film<br />
Tw = wall temperature<br />
A.2.2 Condensation on external horizontal tube<br />
where<br />
hm = 0.725<br />
k 3 ρ∆ρgλ<br />
µ∆T do<br />
1/4<br />
do = out side diamter of the tube<br />
A.2.3 Condensation on banks of horizontal tube<br />
hm = 0.725<br />
k 3 ρ∆ρgλ<br />
µ∆T Jdo<br />
1/4<br />
, (A.6)<br />
, (A.7)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
134 A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
where<br />
J = number of tubes in a row (Fig. ??)<br />
In the above equation the condensate film properties save the latent heat of vaporization<br />
are evaluated at the film temperature.<br />
Tf = Ts + Tw<br />
2<br />
, (A.8)<br />
the latent heat of vaporization is evaluated at the condensate temperature. For the case<br />
of subcooling or superheating the heat transfer coefficient is corrected by substituting the<br />
corrected latent heat the heat transfer equation (Rohsenow et al. [121] and Carey [18]) in<br />
Nusselt [109])<br />
λ ∗ = λ + 0.68cp∆T . (A.9)<br />
A.2.4 Condensation inside horizontal tube<br />
hm = 0.555<br />
A.3 Two phase flow: Pure fluid<br />
A.3.1 Steiner [140] correlation<br />
k 3 ρ∆ρgλ<br />
µ∆T d<br />
1/4<br />
, (A.10)<br />
Steiner [140] has considered the two phase heat transfer coefficient h as a combination of<br />
the convective and the nucleate part using an asymptotic model as:<br />
h = <br />
h 3 n + h 3 1/3 c<br />
, (A.11)<br />
where hn and hc is the nucleate and convective boiling heat transfer coefficient respectively.<br />
The convective boiling heat transfer coefficient for a completely wetted tube (i.e. all types<br />
of flow patterns save stratified and stratified-wavy flow) is calculated as<br />
hc<br />
hL0<br />
⎡<br />
⎧⎡<br />
⎨<br />
= ⎣(1 − ˙x) + 1.2 ˙x<br />
⎩<br />
0.4 (1 − ˙x) 0.01<br />
⎣ hG0<br />
hL0<br />
⎛<br />
˙x 0.01 ⎝1 + 8(1 − ˙x) 0.7<br />
⎤<br />
0.37<br />
ρL<br />
ρG<br />
⎦ +<br />
⎞⎤<br />
0.67 −2<br />
ρL ⎠⎦<br />
ρG<br />
⎫−0.5 ⎪⎬ ⎪⎭<br />
. (A.12)<br />
The heat transfer coefficients hL0 and hG0 are those of single phase flow, assuming that<br />
the total mass velocity is pure liquid or pure vapor respectively. They are calculated in<br />
the case of a fully developed turbulent flow from the Gnielinski [46] model<br />
Nu =<br />
(ξ/8)(Re − 1000)P r<br />
1 + 12.7(ξ/8) 0.5 (P r 2/3 − 1)<br />
, (A.13)<br />
taken in to account the respective dimensionless group NuL0, NuG0, ReL0, ReG0, P rl and<br />
P rg. These dimensionless groups are defined as<br />
NuL0/G0 = hL0/G0d<br />
kL/G<br />
, (A.14)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
A.3 Two phase flow: Pure fluid 135<br />
The friction factor is<br />
ReL0/G0 = ˙md<br />
µL/G<br />
, (A.15)<br />
P rL/G = µL/Gcp,L/G<br />
. (A.16)<br />
kL/G<br />
ξ = (1.82logRe − 1.62) −2 . (A.17)<br />
For a partial wetting of the tube (stratified or stratified-wavy flow) the average heat<br />
transfer coefficient at the tube circumference under the thermal boundary condition of a<br />
constant wall temperature is given as<br />
hc = hwet(1 − Φ) + hGΦ , (A.18)<br />
where hwet is the convective boiling heat transfer coefficient at the wetted part of the<br />
tube and it is calculated by using equation A.12. In the non-wetted part of the tube,<br />
the convective heat transfer coefficient hg is calculated from the Gnielinski [46] model<br />
(equation A.13). In this case Re and Nu are defined with the hydraulic diameter of the<br />
vapor-occupied part of the tube cross-section<br />
dh = d<br />
<br />
ϕ − sin ϕ<br />
d + 2 sin(ϕ/2)<br />
<br />
where ϕ is the stratified angle. The Reynolds number is given as<br />
and<br />
ReG =<br />
˙m ˙xdhyd<br />
ɛµG<br />
hG = NuGkG<br />
dhyd<br />
, (A.19)<br />
, (A.20)<br />
. (A.21)<br />
The void fraction is calculated using the Rauhani [117] model given as<br />
ε = ˙x<br />
ρG<br />
<br />
<br />
˙x<br />
(1 + 0.12(1 − ˙x))<br />
ρG<br />
+ 1 − ˙x<br />
<br />
ρL<br />
+ 1.18(1 − ˙x)[gσ(ρL − ρG)] 1/4<br />
˙mρ . 1/2<br />
−1 L<br />
The wetting boundary can be estimated (see Fig. A.2) from the void fraction as<br />
ε = fG<br />
fG + fL<br />
(A.22)<br />
. (A.23)<br />
With some mathematical manipulation of equation A.23 the non-wetted perimeter can<br />
calculated iteratively from the following relationship<br />
ϕ = 2πε + sinϕ , (A.24)<br />
with the assumption that no bubbles in the liquid phase and no entrainment (hold-up) in<br />
the vapor phase, the scaling parameter Φ of equation A.18 can thus be calculated as<br />
where ϕG = 0.5ϕ.<br />
Φ = ϕG<br />
2π<br />
, (A.25)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
136 A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
f L<br />
f G<br />
U L<br />
U G<br />
U i<br />
ϕ<br />
Figure A.2. Cross-section and perimeter parts of the vapor flow in a horizontal tube.<br />
The local nucleate boiling heat transfer coefficient hnb of a horizontal tube is estimated<br />
as<br />
n(pr) hnb ˙q<br />
= ψCf F (pr)F (Ra)F (d)F ( ˙m, ˙x) . (A.26)<br />
ho ˙qo<br />
The value with a subscript ”o” is a reference value.<br />
The pressure function is given as<br />
F (pr) = 2.692p 0.43<br />
<br />
6.5 1.6pr r +<br />
1 − p4.4 <br />
r<br />
and the mass flux function is given as<br />
where<br />
F ( ˙m, ˙x) = ˙m<br />
˙mo<br />
0.25 ⎡<br />
⎣1 − p 0.1<br />
r<br />
˙q<br />
h<br />
qcr,nb<br />
d<br />
0.3<br />
, (A.27)<br />
⎤<br />
˙x ⎦ , (A.28)<br />
˙qcr,cb = 2.79 ˙qcr,0,1p 0.4<br />
r (1 − pr) . (A.29)<br />
The critical value of ˙qcr,0,1 at a reduced pressure pr of 0.1 is given as<br />
˙qcr,0.1 = 0.13∆hV,0ρ 0.5<br />
G,0[σog(ρL,0 − ρG,0)] 0.25 . (A.30)<br />
The function for the effect of surface roughness and tube diameter is F (Ra) =(Ra/Rao) 0.133<br />
and F (d)=(do/d) 0.5 respectively. The pressure dependence of the heat flux exponent n(pr)<br />
can be predicted as<br />
n(pr) = 0.9 − 0.3p 0.3<br />
r . (A.31)<br />
The experimental value of the specific constant Cf for a number of substances is be found<br />
in VDI-Wärmeatlas[157], for example for water it is 0.72. In absence of an experimental<br />
value it can be estimated as<br />
Cf = 0.789<br />
M<br />
MH2<br />
0.11<br />
, (A.32)<br />
where M is the molecular weight and MH2= 2.016. The correction factor ψ for a stratified<br />
and a stratified-wavy flow pattern under the thermal boundary condition of a constant<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
A.3 Two phase flow: Pure fluid 137<br />
wall temperature is 0.86 for all other type of flow patterns it is taken as unity (VDI-<br />
Wärmeatlas[157]).<br />
Table A.1 shows the reference factors for the nucleate boiling heat transfer coefficient for<br />
R134a and R290.<br />
Table A.1. Values of the reference parameters used in evaluation of the local nucleate boiling<br />
heat transfer coefficient.<br />
Refrigerant ho ˙qo Rao do<br />
W/m 2 K W/m 2 m m<br />
R134a 3,500 20,000 10 −6 0.01<br />
R290 4,000 20,000 10 −6 0.01<br />
A.3.2 Kattan et al. [77] correlation<br />
For a stratified-wavy flow pattern or annular flow pattern with a partial dryout the two<br />
phase heat transfer coefficient is<br />
h = ϕdryhG + (2π − ϕdry)hwet<br />
2π<br />
. (A.33)<br />
The vapor heat transfer coefficient hG is determined by using the Dittus-Boelter [33]<br />
correlation as<br />
hG = 0.023Re 0.8<br />
G P 0.4 kG<br />
rG<br />
d<br />
, (A.34)<br />
with Reynold number given as<br />
˙m ˙xd<br />
ReG = , (A.35)<br />
εµG<br />
where ε is the void fraction given by the Rauhani [117] model (equation A.22). The heat<br />
transfer coefficient on the wetted portion of the tube is<br />
hwet = 3<br />
<br />
h3 n + h3 c . (A.36)<br />
The nucleate boiling heat transfer coefficient hn is given by the Cooper [27] model as<br />
hn = 55p 0.12<br />
r (−0.4343 ln pr) −0.55 M −05 ˙q . (A.37)<br />
The convective heat transfer coefficient is given by a modified form of the Dittus-Boelter<br />
[33] model as<br />
The liquid Reynolds number is given as<br />
hc = 0.0133Re 0.69<br />
L P 0.4 kL<br />
rL<br />
d<br />
ReL =<br />
4 ˙m(1 − ˙x)δ<br />
(1 − ε)µG<br />
where δ is the liquid film thickness it is given as<br />
δ =<br />
πd(1 − ε)<br />
2(2π − ϕdry)<br />
. (A.38)<br />
. (A.39)<br />
, (A.40)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
138 A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
where ϕdry is<br />
ϕdry = ϕstrat<br />
( ˙mwavy − ˙m)<br />
, (A.41)<br />
( ˙mwavy − ˙mstrat)<br />
where ϕstrat is calculated iteratively from equation A.24. The mass flux under a stratified<br />
and wavy flow pattern is<br />
and<br />
˙mwavy =<br />
<br />
˙mstrat = (226.3)2 fLf 2 GρG(ρL − ρG)µLg cos Θ<br />
0.3164(1 − ˙x) 1.75 π 2 µ 0.25<br />
L<br />
16f 3 GgdρLρG<br />
˙x 2π2 (1 − (2hL − 1) 2 ) 0.5<br />
<br />
2 π<br />
25h2 (1 − x)<br />
L<br />
F1( ˙q)<br />
×<br />
, (A.42)<br />
F2( ˙q)<br />
W e<br />
+<br />
F r L<br />
1<br />
0.5<br />
+ 50 ,<br />
cos Θ<br />
(A.43)<br />
respectively. The parameters fL, fG, hL are defined in Fig.A.2. Θ is the angle of inclination<br />
to the horizontal and<br />
<br />
F1( ˙q) = 646.0<br />
˙q<br />
2 <br />
+ 64.8<br />
˙q<br />
<br />
;<br />
<br />
F2( ˙q) = 18.8<br />
˙q<br />
<br />
+ 1.023 . (A.44)<br />
˙qcrit<br />
˙qcrit<br />
The stratified-wavy flow model is also valid for the stratified flow patten with ϕstrat<br />
replacing ϕdry and for the annular flow condition with ϕdry is set to zero and the film<br />
thickness δ is set to (1 − ε)d/4.<br />
A.3.3 Kandlikar [70] correlation<br />
The flow boiling heat transfer coefficient for a pure fluid is given by Kandlikar [70] as<br />
˙qcrit<br />
h = max(hn, hc) , (A.45)<br />
wher the subscript n and c in equation A.45 refers to the nucleate and convective boiling<br />
respectively. The convective and the nucleate boiling part is given as<br />
and<br />
hn = 0.6683Co −0.2 (1 − ˙x) 0.8 hL0f(FrL0) + 1058.0Bo 0.7 (1 − ˙x) 0.8 FF lhL0 , (A.46)<br />
hc = 1.136Co −0.9 (1 − ˙x) 0.8 hL0f(FrL0) + 667.2Bo 0.7 (1 − ˙x) 0.8 FF lhL0 , (A.47)<br />
respectively, where F rL0 is the liquid Froude number, Bo is the boiling number and Co<br />
is the convection number. These dimensionless groups are defined as<br />
F rL0 = ˙m<br />
, Bo =<br />
ρLgd<br />
The function f(FrL0) is defined as<br />
˙q<br />
, Co =<br />
˙m∆hv<br />
ρG<br />
ρL<br />
0.5 1 − ˙x<br />
f(FrL0) = (25FrL0) 0.324 FrL0 < 0.04 ,<br />
f(FrL0) = 1 FrL0 ≥ 0.04 ,<br />
˙x<br />
0.8<br />
. (A.48)<br />
where FF l is a fluid-surface parameter related to the nucleation characteristic. For all<br />
type of fluids flowing in a stainless tube it is taken as 1. The single phase heat transfer<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
A.3 Two phase flow: Pure fluid 139<br />
coefficient hL0 is obtained from the Petukhov and Popov [114] correlation or Gnielinski<br />
[46] correlation. The Petukhov and Popov [114] correlation is valid in the range of 0.5 ≤<br />
PrL ≤ 2000 and 10 4 ≤ ReL0 ≤ 5 × 10 6 and it is given as<br />
NuL0 = hL0d<br />
k =<br />
ReL0P rL(ξ/2)<br />
1.07 + 12.7(P 2/3<br />
. (A.49)<br />
rL − 1)(ξ/2) 0.5<br />
The Gnielinski [46] correlation (equation A.13) is valid in the range of 0.5 ≤ PrL ≤<br />
2000 and 2300 ≤ ReL0 ≤ 5 × 10 4 . The friction factor ξ in equation A.49 is given by<br />
equation A.17.<br />
A.3.4 Chen [19] correlation<br />
Chen [19] postulated that the heat transfer coefficient is made of two parts: a) a microconvective<br />
(or nucleate boiling) portion hn and b) a macro-convective (or forced convective)<br />
portion hc as<br />
h = hcF + hnS , (A.50)<br />
where hc is calculated using the Dittus and Boelter [33] correlation as<br />
where<br />
hc = 0.023 kL<br />
d Re0.8 L P r 0.4<br />
L , (A.51)<br />
(1 − ˙x) ˙md<br />
ReL = , P rL = cpLµL<br />
, (A.52)<br />
µL<br />
The suppression factor for the convection part is<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
F =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
kL<br />
1 if 1/Xtt > 0.1<br />
2.35 1<br />
Xtt + 0.213 0.736<br />
and the Martinelli parameter Xtt is given as<br />
<br />
1 − ˙x<br />
X =<br />
˙x<br />
The nucleate boiling heat transfer coefficient is<br />
where<br />
hn = 0.00122<br />
if 1/Xtt ≤ 0.1<br />
0.875 0.5 0.125 ρG µL<br />
ρL<br />
k0.79 L c0.45 p,L ρ0.49 L<br />
σ0.5 µ 0.29<br />
L ρ0.24 V<br />
G ∆h 0.24<br />
µG<br />
,<br />
. (A.53)<br />
∆T 0.24<br />
sat ∆p 0.75<br />
sat , (A.54)<br />
∆Tsat = Tw − Ts; ∆psat = p(Tw) − p(Ts); Retp = ReLF 1.25 . (A.55)<br />
The suppression factor for the nucleate part is<br />
S =<br />
1<br />
1 + 2.53 × 10 −6 Retp<br />
. (A.56)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
140 A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
A.3.5 Gungor and Winterton [52] correlation<br />
The Gungor and Winterton [52] correlation is a modified form of the Chen [19] correlation<br />
given by equation A.50 with the nucleate boiling calculated from the Cooper [27] correlation<br />
given by equation A.37. The suppression factor for the convection part is defined<br />
as<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
F =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
(1 + 24, 000Bo1.16 + 1.37(1/xtt) 0.86 (0.1−2F rL)<br />
)F r L if F r < 0.05<br />
1 + 24, 000Bo 1.16 + 1.37(1/xtt) 0.86 if F r ≥ 0.05<br />
and the suppression factor for the nucleate part is<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
S =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
(1 + 0.00000115F 2 ReL) −1 F r 1/2<br />
L if F r < 0.05<br />
(1 + 0.00000115F 2 ReL) −1 if F r ≥ 0.05<br />
The convective boiling part is calculated from the Dittus-Boelter [33] correlation (equation<br />
A.51).<br />
A.3.6 Shah [130] correlation<br />
The Shah [130] correlation is given as<br />
h = max(hc, hn) , (A.57)<br />
where the subscript n and c in equation A.57 refers to the nucleate and convective boiling<br />
respectively. The convective heat transfer coefficient is defined as<br />
where<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
N =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
hc = 1.8hLN −0.8 , (A.58)<br />
Co F rL > 0.04<br />
0.38F r −0.4<br />
L Co F rL < 0.04<br />
where hL is calculated using the Dittus-Boelter [33] correlation (equation A.51). The<br />
nucleate boiling heat transfer coefficient is calculated as follows<br />
where<br />
• For N > 1<br />
• For 1 > N > 0.1<br />
• For N < 0.1<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨ 230hLBo<br />
hn =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
0.5 Bo > 0.0003<br />
1 + 46hLBo0.5 Bo < 0.0003<br />
hn = F hLBo 0.5 exp(2.74N −0.1 ) . (A.59)<br />
hn = F hLBo 0.5 exp(2.47N −0.15 ) , (A.60)<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨ 14.7 Bo > 0.0011<br />
F =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
15.43 Bo < 0.0011<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com<br />
.<br />
,<br />
.<br />
,<br />
,
A.3 Two phase flow: Pure fluid 141<br />
A.3.7 Schrock and Grossman [129] correlation<br />
A very simple correlation is given by Schrock and Grossman [129] as<br />
<br />
h = 1.91hL 10 4 <br />
1<br />
× Bo + 1.5<br />
Xtt<br />
2/3 0.6<br />
where hL is calculated using Dittus-Boelter [33] correlation equation A.51.<br />
A.3.8 Dembi et al. [30] correlation<br />
, (A.61)<br />
The Dembi et al. [30] correlation is based on the asymptotic model given by equation<br />
A.11 with the nucleate and convection part given as<br />
and<br />
hn = 23388.5 kL<br />
d<br />
<br />
hc = 0.115 kL<br />
d<br />
˙q<br />
ρG∆hV ϖ<br />
respectively. The parameter ϖ is defined as<br />
A.3.9 Klimenko [84] correlation<br />
0.64 gd<br />
∆hV<br />
0.27 <br />
˙m 2 d<br />
ρL∆hV ϖ<br />
0.14<br />
, (A.62)<br />
<br />
˙x 4 (1 − ˙x) 2 <br />
0.11<br />
2 0.14<br />
˙m ∆hV<br />
P<br />
ρLgσ<br />
0.27<br />
rL , (A.63)<br />
ϖ = 0.36 × 10 −3 p −1.4<br />
r . (A.64)<br />
The Klimenko [84] correlation is based on the asymptotic model given by equation A.11<br />
with the convection part given by the Dittus-Boelter [33] correlation equation A.51 and<br />
the nucleate boiling is<br />
where<br />
hn =<br />
<br />
hn1 = 7.4 × 10 −3<br />
hn2 = 0.087 kL<br />
b<br />
hn1 NCB < 1.6 × 10 4<br />
hn2 NCB > 1.6 × 10 4 ,<br />
kw<br />
kw<br />
kL<br />
kL<br />
0.15<br />
P e 0.6 K 0.5<br />
p P r −1/3<br />
L , (A.65)<br />
0.09<br />
Re 0.6<br />
m<br />
ρG<br />
ρL<br />
0.2<br />
P r 1/6<br />
L , (A.66)<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
qb<br />
p<br />
2σ<br />
P e =<br />
, Kp = <br />
, b =<br />
, (A.67)<br />
∆hV ρGaL<br />
σg(ρL − ρG) g(ρL − ρG)<br />
Rem = wmb<br />
, wm = ˙m<br />
<br />
1 + x<br />
νL<br />
ρL<br />
ρL<br />
ρG<br />
− 1<br />
<br />
, Re∗ =<br />
qb<br />
∆hV ρGνL<br />
, NCB = Rem<br />
Re∗<br />
<br />
ρL<br />
ρG<br />
.<br />
(A.68)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
142 A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
A.3.10 Jung et al. [64] correlation<br />
The Jung et al. [64] correlation is a modified form of the Chen [19] correlation. The<br />
convection heat transfer coefficient is calculated using the Dittus-Boelter [33] correlation<br />
(equation A.51) and the nucleate part is calculated from the Stephan and Abdelsalm in<br />
VDI-Wärmeatlas [157] correlation as<br />
where<br />
hn = 207 kL<br />
0.745 0.581 ˙q(b.d) ρG<br />
P<br />
b.d<br />
0.533<br />
rL , (A.69)<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
S =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
kLTs<br />
(b.d) = 0.511<br />
A.4 Two phase flow: Mixture<br />
A.4.1 Steiner [140] correlation<br />
<br />
2σ<br />
ρL<br />
g(ρL − ρG)<br />
<br />
F = 2.37 0.29 + 1<br />
<br />
Xtt<br />
0.5<br />
4048X 1.22<br />
tt Bo 1.13 Xtt < 1<br />
2.0 − 0.1X −0.28<br />
tt Bo −0.33 1 ≤ Xtt ≤ 5<br />
, (A.70)<br />
, (A.71)<br />
Steiner [140] has extended his pure component asymptotic model to mixture. The nucleate<br />
part of the heat transfer coefficient is suppressed using the Schlünder [126] suppression<br />
factor for the nucleate boiling. The Schlünder [126] suppression factor is based on the<br />
heat and mass transfer laws it is defined as<br />
<br />
Fn = 1 + hid,n<br />
˙q (Tb,k<br />
<br />
− Tb,j)(yj − xj) 1 − exp<br />
Boq<br />
.<br />
ρL∆hV βL<br />
<br />
, (A.72)<br />
where Tb is the saturated (boiling) temperature of the pure component, the index j and<br />
k stands for the more volatile and less volatile component respectively. βL/B0 = 5 × 10 5<br />
is the mass transfer coefficient. The ideal nucleate boiling heat transfer coefficient for a<br />
mixture hid,n is calculated from the heat transfer coefficient of pure components as<br />
hid,n =<br />
xi<br />
hi,n<br />
−1<br />
, (A.73)<br />
and Bo/βL = 5.10 3 and ρL and ∆hV is the ideal density and enthalpy of evaporation of<br />
the mixture respectively. x and y is the liquid and vapor mole fraction of the more volatile<br />
component respectively.<br />
The same approach applies also to the convective part for the liquid-liquid immiscible<br />
mixture. That is to say for a liquid-liquid miscible mixture the convective suppression<br />
factor made analogous to that for the nucleate boiling heat transfer coefficient as<br />
<br />
Fc = 1 + hid,c<br />
˙q (Tb,k<br />
<br />
− Tb,j)(yj − xj) 1 − exp<br />
Boq<br />
ρL∆hV βL<br />
<br />
. (A.74)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
A.4 Two phase flow: Mixture 143<br />
A.4.2 Kandlikar [71] correlation<br />
Kandlikar [71] has extended his pure component correlation (Kandlikar [70]) to mixtures<br />
as<br />
• Region I: Near-azeotropic region<br />
h = max(hn, hc) , (A.75)<br />
where hn and hc is obtained from equation A.77 and equation A.47 respectively<br />
using the mixture properties.<br />
• Region II: Moderate diffusion-induced suppression region<br />
h = hc , (A.76)<br />
where hc is given by equation A.77 with the properties of the mixture.<br />
• Region III: Severe diffusion-induced suppression region: 0.03< V1 < 0.2 and Bo ≤<br />
1E −4 ; V1 ≥ 0.2<br />
where<br />
h = 1.136Co −0.9 (1 − ˙x) 0.8 h L0 f(FrL0) + 667.2Bo 0.7 (1 − ˙x) 0.8 FF lhL0FD , (A.77)<br />
V1 =<br />
cpL<br />
∆hV<br />
a<br />
D12<br />
FD = 0.678<br />
1 + V1<br />
A.4.3 Bennett and Chen [8] correlation<br />
<br />
0.5 dT<br />
|y − x|<br />
dx<br />
, (A.78)<br />
. (A.79)<br />
Bennett and Chen [8] has extended the Chen [19] correlation (equation A.50) for mixture.<br />
Here both the convective and the nucleate parts are suppressed. The convection<br />
part which is calculated for the original Chen [19] correlation with mixture properties is<br />
suppressed using the following suppression factor<br />
Fc = Tw − Tph<br />
Tw − Ts<br />
, (A.80)<br />
where Tw, Tph, and Ts is the wall, equilibrium temperature and saturation temperature<br />
respectively. The nucleate part is also calculated using the original Chen [19] model for<br />
the pure substance with mixture properties. It suppressed using the the suppression factor<br />
given by equation A.79.<br />
A.4.4 Palen [111] correlation<br />
Palen [111] has extended the original Chen [19] correlation for pure component (equation<br />
A.50) to mixture similar to the Bennett and Chen [8] correlation. However, only the<br />
nucleate part is suppressed using the following suppression factor<br />
Fd = exp(−0.027∆Tbp) , (A.81)<br />
where ∆Tbp is difference between the dew and bubble point temperature of the mixture.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
144 A <strong>Heat</strong> transfer coefficient<br />
A.4.5 Jung et al. [64] correlation<br />
Jung et al. [64] have extended their pure substance correlation to the mixture. The nucleate<br />
boiling heat transfer coefficient is replaced by the ideal one given by equation A.73.<br />
The convective part is suppressed using the following suppression factor<br />
Fc = 1.0 − 0 − 35|y1 − x1| 1.56 . (A.82)<br />
For the nucleate part the following suppression factor is employed<br />
where<br />
and<br />
Fn =<br />
1<br />
2 , (A.83)<br />
{[1 + (b2 + b3)(1 + b4)](1 + b5)}<br />
<br />
1.01 − x1<br />
b2 = (1 − x1) ln<br />
+ x1 ln<br />
1.01 − y1<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
b3 =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
0.1 x1<br />
y1<br />
<br />
x1<br />
y1<br />
0 x1 ≥ 0.01<br />
<br />
p<br />
b4 = 152<br />
− 1 x1 < 0.01<br />
pc,1<br />
0.66<br />
b5 = 0.92|y1 − x1| 0.001<br />
<br />
p<br />
pc,1<br />
+ |y1 − x1| 1.5 , (A.84)<br />
,<br />
, (A.85)<br />
0.66<br />
x1<br />
y1 = 1 for x1 = y1 = 0 ,<br />
, (A.86)<br />
x1 and y1 is the liquid and vapor mole fraction of the more volatile component respectively.<br />
p and pc,1 is system pressure and critical pressure of the more volatile component<br />
respectively.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
B Pressure drop<br />
B.1 Single phase<br />
The pressure drop due to friction exists because of the shear stress between the fluid and<br />
the tube wall. Estimation of the friction pressure drop is somewhat more complex and<br />
various approaches have been taken, for example the frictional pressure gradient is given<br />
as<br />
−<br />
<br />
dp<br />
dz f<br />
= 4τo<br />
d<br />
= 4f ˙m2<br />
2dρ<br />
145<br />
, (B.1)<br />
where ˙m is the mass flux in kg/m2s and f is the friction factor calculated using a Blasiustype<br />
model as<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
f =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
0.3164<br />
Re0.25 64<br />
Re<br />
Re<br />
Re<br />
≥ 2320<br />
< 2320 .<br />
Integration of equation B.1 yields<br />
∆p =<br />
4f ˙m2<br />
2ρ<br />
L<br />
d<br />
, (B.2)<br />
B.2 Two phase<br />
In flow boiling, the temperature drops in the direction of flow as a result of the pressure<br />
drop. This results in a change in the driving force (temperature difference) for the heat<br />
transfer along the flow path. Thus beside the heat transfer coefficient, knowledge of the<br />
pressure drop is of paramount importance in the design of the evaporator. In the present<br />
work the pressure drop is measured simultaneously with the heat transfer coefficient along<br />
the test section.<br />
The momentum balance implies that the two phase pressure gradient is composed of three<br />
components as<br />
dp<br />
dz =<br />
<br />
dp<br />
+<br />
dz f<br />
<br />
dp<br />
+<br />
dz a<br />
<br />
dp<br />
dz h<br />
, (B.3)<br />
where dp/dz, (dp/dz) f , (dp/dz) a and (dp/dz) h is the total, friction, acceleration and<br />
hydrostatic pressure gradient respectively. For a horizontal tube the hydrostatic pressure<br />
gradient diminishes. The acceleration pressure drop is caused by the change in momentum<br />
in both the liquid and vapor phases. The change in the momentum stems from the change<br />
in the velocity of the two phases, which is brought about by the added (or withdrawn)<br />
heat to/from the test section. For the case of adiabatic flow the acceleration pressure drop<br />
diminishes for ∆pa/ps → 0 (Baehr and Stephan [3]), where ps is the saturation pressure.<br />
There exist in the literature a number of approaches for modelling the change in the static<br />
pressure drop due to acceleration. The most widely accepted models include homogenous<br />
or separated flow models. The separated flow model is also widely known as the heterogenous<br />
model. In the homogenous model the static pressure drop due to acceleration<br />
is<br />
<br />
<br />
dp<br />
2 d 1<br />
− = ˙m ˙x −<br />
dz dz ρL<br />
a<br />
1<br />
<br />
+<br />
ρG<br />
1<br />
<br />
. (B.4)<br />
ρL<br />
The energy balance in a small unit length dz along the test tube yields<br />
d ˙x<br />
dz<br />
= 4 ˙q<br />
˙m∆hvd<br />
. (B.5)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
146 B Pressure drop<br />
Substitution of equation B.5 into equation B.4 yields the pressure drop due to acceleration<br />
as<br />
<br />
4 ˙q ˙m<br />
∆pa = 1 −<br />
d∆hvρG<br />
ρG<br />
<br />
∆L .<br />
ρL<br />
(B.6)<br />
In the separated flow model the static pressure drop due to acceleration can be derived<br />
from the momentum balance as<br />
<br />
dp<br />
−<br />
dz<br />
<br />
2<br />
2 d ˙x<br />
= ˙m<br />
dz ερG<br />
+ (1 − ˙x)2<br />
<br />
(1 − ε)ρL<br />
. (B.7)<br />
a<br />
Integration of equation B.7 between the inlet i and outlet o of the test section yields<br />
−∆pa = −(po − pi)a = ˙m 2<br />
<br />
˙x 2 2<br />
εoρG,o<br />
+ (1 − ˙xo) 2<br />
(1 − εo)ρL,o<br />
− ˙x2 <br />
2<br />
i (1 − ˙xi)<br />
− .<br />
εiρG,i (1 − εi)ρL,i<br />
(B.8)<br />
The void fraction ε may be obtained using the Rauhani [117] model which is given as:<br />
ε = ˙x<br />
ρG<br />
<br />
<br />
˙x<br />
(1 + 0.12(1 − ˙x))<br />
ρG<br />
+ 1 − ˙x<br />
<br />
ρL<br />
+ 1.18(1 − ˙x)[gσ(ρL − ρG)] 1/4<br />
˙mρ 1/2<br />
−1 L<br />
, (B.9)<br />
where ρL and ρG is the liquid and vapor density respectively, which are calculated from the<br />
fundamental equation of state of Tillner-Roth and Baehr [152] for R134a. g is acceleration<br />
due to gravity, σ is the surface tension, ˙m is the mass flux and ˙x is the quality. The surface<br />
tension is calculated using the method of Lucus [92] given in VDI-Wärmeatlas [157].<br />
The pressure drop due to friction exists because of the shear stress between the fluid and<br />
the tube wall. Estimation of the friction pressure drop is somewhat more complex and<br />
various approaches have been taken, for example in homogenous or separated flow models.<br />
In the homogenous model the frictional pressure gradient is given as<br />
−<br />
<br />
dp<br />
dz<br />
f<br />
= 4τo<br />
d<br />
= 2ξ ˙m2<br />
dρH<br />
, (B.10)<br />
where ξ is the two phase friction factor calculated by a Blasius-type model as<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
ξ =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
and the homogenous densityρH is given as<br />
1<br />
ρH<br />
The two phase Reynolds number Re is<br />
0.3164<br />
Re0.25 Re ≥ 2320<br />
64 Re < 2320 .<br />
Re<br />
= 1 − ˙x<br />
ρL<br />
Re = ˙md<br />
ηT P<br />
+ ˙x<br />
ρG<br />
. (B.11)<br />
, (B.12)<br />
where ηT P is a two-phase viscosity. A variety of methods have been proposed to calculate<br />
the two phase viscosity, a commonly used one being that proposed by McAdams et al. [95]<br />
1<br />
ηT P<br />
= 1 − ˙x<br />
ηL<br />
+ ˙x<br />
ηG<br />
, (B.13)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
B.2 Two phase 147<br />
where ηL and ηG are the liquid and vapor viscosity.<br />
In the separated flow model the two phase frictional pressure drop is related to that for<br />
single phase as <br />
dp<br />
dz f<br />
=<br />
<br />
dP<br />
ΨG/L , (B.14)<br />
dz f,L/G<br />
where Ψ is the two phase multiplier. There exist a number of correlations for the prediction<br />
of Ψ. These include Friedel [42], Chishlom [22] and Lockhart and the Martinelli [91] model.<br />
These models are presented in Appendix B. There exists a number of correlations for the<br />
prediction of the two phase multiplier Ψ of the separated flow model. These models are<br />
presented in the following subsections.<br />
B.2.1 Friedel [42] model<br />
where<br />
H =<br />
ΨL0 = E +<br />
3.24F H<br />
F r0.045 , (B.15)<br />
W e0.035 E = (1 − ˙x) 2 2 ρLfG0<br />
+ ˙x<br />
ρGfL0<br />
, (B.16)<br />
F = ˙x 0.78 (1 − ˙x) 0.24 , (B.17)<br />
0.91 0.19 <br />
ρL µG<br />
ρG<br />
µL<br />
F r = ˙m2<br />
gdρ 2 H<br />
1 − µG<br />
µL<br />
0.7<br />
, (B.18)<br />
, (B.19)<br />
W e = ˙m2 d<br />
, (B.20)<br />
σρH<br />
d is tube diameter, σ is the surface tension and ϱH is the homogenous density given by<br />
equation B.11. fG0 and fL0 are the friction factors defined by a Blasius-type model as<br />
fL0/G0 = 0.079<br />
Re 0.25<br />
L0/G0<br />
, (B.21)<br />
where Re = ˙md/µ. The range of the validity of the Friedel [42] model is µL/µG < 1000<br />
B.2.2 Lockhart and Martinelli [91] model<br />
In the Lockhart and Martinelli [91] model the two phase friction multiplier is<br />
ψ 2 L = 1 + C<br />
X<br />
1<br />
+ , (B.22)<br />
X2 ψ 2 G = 1 + C.X + X 2 , (B.23)<br />
where X is the Martinelli parameter and the value of the coefficient C is given in Table B.1.<br />
The range of the applicability of the Lockhart and Martinelli [91] correlation is µL/µG >1000<br />
and ˙m
148 B Pressure drop<br />
Table B.1. Value of C for the Lockhart and Martinelli [91] correlation.<br />
Liquid Gas Subscript C<br />
Turbulent Turbulent tt 20<br />
Viscous Turbulent vt 12<br />
Turbulent Viscous tv 10<br />
Viscous Viscous vv 05<br />
B.2.3 Chisholm [22] model<br />
In the Chisholm [22] model the two phase friction multiplier is<br />
where<br />
ΨL0 = 1 + (Y 2 − 1) <br />
B ˙x (2/n−1) (1 − ˙x) (2/n−1) + ˙x 1−n<br />
Y 2 = (dpf/dz)G0<br />
(dpf/dz)L0<br />
n is 0.25 for a Blasius model. The parameter B is given by<br />
, (B.24)<br />
, (B.25)<br />
B = 55<br />
˙m 1/2 0 < Y < 9.5 , (B.26)<br />
B = 520<br />
Y ˙m 1/2 9.5 < Y < 28 , (B.27)<br />
B = 15000<br />
Y 2 ˙m 1/2 28 < Y . (B.28)<br />
The range of the validity of the Chisholm [22] correlation is µL/µG > 1000 and ˙m > 100<br />
kg/m 2 s.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
C Physical properties<br />
The fluid physical properties required for heat exchanger design are divided in thermodynamic<br />
and trasport properties. The transport properties include viscosity, thermal<br />
conductivity, surface tension and diffusion coefficient are generally calculated from the<br />
existing correlations (Pery and Coulson). The thermodynamic properties include demsity,<br />
specific heat temperature, pressure (vapor), enthalpy, latent heat of evaporation.<br />
Beside the fluid properties the thermal conductivity of the material is necessary for the<br />
evaluation of heat transfer coefficient. The thermodynamic properties are evaluated using<br />
critical tables.<br />
C.1 Physical properties: Pure fluid<br />
C.1.1 Specific heat<br />
The specific heat of the ideal gas is given in as<br />
Cp = CP V AP A + (CP V AP B)T + (CP V AP C)T 2 + (CP V AP D)T 3<br />
149<br />
(C.1)<br />
Where T is in K and CPVAPA, CPVAPB, CPVAPC, CPVAPD are constant in ideal<br />
gas heat capacity. These constant are given in Appendix A for organic and inorganic<br />
compounds.<br />
C.1.2 Vapor pressure<br />
The vapor pressure is generally predicted using Antonie equation as<br />
ln p = ANT A −<br />
ANT B<br />
T + ANT C<br />
(C.2)<br />
where T is in K and ANTA, ANTB,ANTC are Anonie equation constant. These constant<br />
are given in Appendix D for organic and inorganic compounds.<br />
C.1.3 Liquid viscosity<br />
The liquid viscosity is given as:<br />
<br />
1<br />
log µ = V ISA<br />
T<br />
<br />
1<br />
−<br />
V ISB<br />
(C.3)<br />
where VISA, VISB are constants in the liquid viscosity equation. These constant are<br />
given in Appendix D for organic and inorganic compounds.<br />
C.1.4 Vapor dynamic viscosity VDI-Wärmeatlas [157]<br />
Lucas and Luckas [92] in VDI-Wärmeatlas [157] have recommended the following procedure<br />
for the calculation of the vapor viscosity.<br />
for Tr ≤ 1 and pr ≤ ps/pc<br />
with<br />
η = (ηξ) r 1<br />
FpFQ<br />
ξ<br />
, (C.4)<br />
(ηξ) r = 0.600 + 0.760p α r + (6.990p β r − 0.6)(1 − Tr) , (C.5)<br />
α = 3.262 + 14.98p 5.508<br />
r and β = 1.390 + 5.746pr , (C.6)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
150 C Physical properties<br />
for 1≤ Tr ≤ 40 and 0≤ pr ≤ 100<br />
(ηξ) r = (η o ξ)<br />
<br />
1 +<br />
where η o is the low pressure viscosity given as<br />
Ap E r<br />
Bp F r + (1 + Cp D r ) −1<br />
<br />
, (C.7)<br />
η o ξ = [0.807T 0.618<br />
r − 0.357 exp(−0.449Tr) + 0.340 exp(−4.058Tr) + 0.018]F o p F o Q , (C.8)<br />
and ξ is given as<br />
ξ = [Tc] 1/6 [R] 1/6 [Na] 1/3<br />
[M] 1/2 [pc] 2/3 , (C.9)<br />
where Na is the Avagadro number in kmol. The coefficients of equation C.7 are given as<br />
A = a1<br />
exp(a2T<br />
Tr<br />
γ r ) , (C.10)<br />
B = A(b1Tr − b2) , (C.11)<br />
C = c1<br />
D = d1<br />
exp(c2T<br />
Tr<br />
δ r ) , (C.12)<br />
exp(d2T<br />
Tr<br />
ɛ r ) , (C.13)<br />
E = 1.3088 , (C.14)<br />
F = f1 exp(f2T ς r ) . (C.15)<br />
The coefficients a, b, c, d, e, and f are given in Table C.1<br />
Table C.1. Coefficients of the correlation used for the prediction of the vapor dynamic viscosity.<br />
a1 1.245.10 −3 a2 5.1726 c1 0.4489 c2 3.0578 γ -0.3286<br />
b1 1.6553 b2 1.2723 d1 1.7368 d2 2.2310 δ -37.7332<br />
f1 0.9425 f2 −0.1853 ς 0.4489 ɛ -7.6351<br />
Fp = 1 + (F o p − 1)<br />
(ηξ) r<br />
η o ξ<br />
−3<br />
, (C.16)<br />
and<br />
FQ = 1 + (F o <br />
r (ηξ)<br />
Q − 1)<br />
ηo −1 <br />
r (ηξ)<br />
− 0.007 ln<br />
ξ<br />
ηo 4 ξ<br />
, (C.17)<br />
where F o p and F o Q is low-pressure polarity and quantum factors respectively. These factors<br />
are<br />
F o p = 1 , 0 ≤ µr < 0.022 , (C.18)<br />
F o p = 1 + 30.55(0.292 − Zc) 1.7 , 0.022 ≤ µr < 0.075 , (C.19)<br />
F o p = 1 + 30.55(0.292 − Zc) 1.7 (|0.96 + 0.1(Tr − 0.7)|) , 0.075 ≤ µr , (C.20)<br />
where Zc is the critical compressibility factor and F o Q = 1.0 for all substances other than<br />
He, H2 and D2 . The reduced dipole moment µr is given as<br />
µr = µ2pc , (C.21)<br />
(kTc) 2<br />
where the dipole moment µ for the gases is given in VDI-Wärmeatlas [157]<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
C.1 Physical properties: Pure fluid 151<br />
C.1.5 Dynamic viscosity of Fenghour et al. [40]<br />
The functional form of the liquid and vapor viscosity of ammonia as given by Fenghour<br />
et al. [40] is<br />
η = ηo(T ) + η1(T )ρ + η2(ρ, T ) , (C.22)<br />
The first term of the expansion is the dilute gas term which is given as<br />
<br />
0.021357<br />
ηo(T ) = 100<br />
0.29572 <br />
( MT 1/2 )<br />
, (C.23)<br />
exp(Ω)<br />
where M is the molecular weight in g/mol, T is the temperature in K. The collision<br />
integral Ω is defined as<br />
Ω(T ) =<br />
<br />
C(1) + C(2) log<br />
kT<br />
ɛ<br />
<br />
4<br />
<br />
+ C(n) log<br />
n=3<br />
kT<br />
ɛ<br />
n <br />
where ɛ/k=386 K and the value of the coefficient C is given in table C.2.<br />
Table C.2. Coefficients for the Collision integral Ω (equation C.24).<br />
, (C.24)<br />
C(1) 4.9931822 C(2) -0.61122364 C(3) 0.18535124 C(4) -0.1116094<br />
The second term of equation C.22 represents the contribution of the moderately dense<br />
fluid<br />
where<br />
η1(T ) = Fv(T )ηo(T )ρ , (C.25)<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
<br />
13<br />
Fv(T ) = C A(1) + A(i) log<br />
⎪⎩<br />
i=2<br />
kT<br />
ɛ<br />
⎫<br />
−(i−1) ⎪⎬ 2<br />
⎪⎭<br />
, (C.26)<br />
where C=0.6022137/0.2957 3 and the value of the coefficient A is given in table C.3<br />
Table C.3. Coefficients of equation C.26.<br />
i A i A<br />
1 -0.17999496×10 1 2 0.466692621×10 2<br />
3 -0.53460794×10 3 4 0.33604074×10 4<br />
5 -0.13019164×10 5 6 0.33414230×10 5<br />
7 -0.58711743×10 5 8 0.71426686×10 5<br />
9 -0.59834012×10 5 10 0.33652741×10 5<br />
11 -0.12027350×10 5 12 0.24348205×10 4<br />
13 -0.120807957×10 3<br />
The third term in the viscosity equation C.22 is the contribution of the dense gas<br />
3<br />
η2(ρ, T ) = F (i, T )ρ<br />
i=1<br />
i+1 , (C.27)<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
152 C Physical properties<br />
where<br />
⎧<br />
⎪⎨<br />
F (i, T ) =<br />
⎪⎩<br />
1 0.219664285 2 ɛ − 0.83651107 × 10 kT<br />
−1 4 ɛ<br />
kT<br />
2 0.17366936 × 10−2 − 0.83651107 × 10−2 <br />
ɛ<br />
kT<br />
3 0.167668649 × 10−3 2 ɛ − 0.149710093 × 10 kT<br />
−3 3 ɛ + kT<br />
0.77012274 × 10−4 4 ɛ<br />
kT<br />
The Fenghour et al. [40] correlation for the vapor viscosity of ammonia has an uncertainty<br />
of 2% in the temperature range of T < Tc.<br />
C.1.6 Surface tension<br />
Lucas and Luckas [92] in VDI-Wärmeatlas [157] have recommended the following correlation<br />
for the calculation of the surface tension<br />
m<br />
1 − Tr<br />
b , (C.28)<br />
σ = p 2/3<br />
c T 1/3<br />
c<br />
where the reduced pressure and temperature are defined as<br />
respectively.<br />
For a polar fluid like R134a the following quantities are valid<br />
a<br />
pr = p<br />
, Tr = T<br />
, , (C.29)<br />
pc<br />
a = 1 , (C.30)<br />
b = 0.1574 + 0.359ω − 1.769X − 13.69X 2 − 0.510ω 2 + 1.298ωX , (C.31)<br />
m = 1.210 + 0.5385ω − 14.61X − 32.07X 2 − 1.656ω 2 + 22, 03ωX , (C.32)<br />
X = lgpsr(Tr = 0.6) + 1.70ω + 1.552 . (C.33)<br />
where ω is the acentric factor and it is given by Pitzer in VDI-Wärmeatlas [157] as The<br />
surface tension given by equation C.28 is in 10 −5 N/cm. Its level of uncertainty as given<br />
by Reid et al. [118] is 1.2 % in the range of the reduced temperature of 0.56 ≤ Tr ≤ 0.63.<br />
C.1.7 Thermal conductivity for liquids<br />
k = 3.65 × 10 −5 <br />
ρ 1/3<br />
Cp . (C.34)<br />
M<br />
where k thermal conductivity W/moC, M is the molecular mass, Cp speific heat capacity<br />
(kJ/kg oC), ρ density (kg/m 3<br />
)<br />
C.1.8 Thermal conductivity for gases<br />
Tc<br />
<br />
k = µ Cp + 10.4<br />
<br />
M<br />
. (C.35)<br />
where k thermal conductivity W/m o C, M is the molecular mass, Cp specific heat capacity<br />
(kJ/kg o C), µ viscosity in (mNs/m 2 )<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
C.2 Physical properties: Mixture 153<br />
C.1.9 Specific enthalpy<br />
For the vapor phase, the deviation of the specific enthalpy from the ideal state can be<br />
illustrated using Redlich-Kwong equation written as<br />
where z is the compressibilty factor defined as<br />
and<br />
z 3 + z 2 + z(B 2 + B − A) = 0 . (C.36)<br />
h = ho + RT +<br />
z = pv<br />
RT<br />
A = aP<br />
R2 bp<br />
, B =<br />
T 2.5 RT<br />
<br />
v<br />
C.2 Physical properties: Mixture<br />
C.2.1 Liquid dynamic viscosity of mixtures<br />
0<br />
T<br />
. (C.37)<br />
. (C.38)<br />
dP<br />
R2T 2.5 <br />
− p dv . (C.39)<br />
dT<br />
For a liquid mixture which contains one or more polar constituents Reid et al. [118]<br />
recommended the following model for the calculation of the mixture liquid viscosity<br />
n<br />
ln ηm = xi. ln ηL,i + 2.x1.x2.G12 , (C.40)<br />
i=1<br />
where xi is the mole fraction of the component i, ηL,i is the viscosity of the component i<br />
in kg/ms and G12 is an adjustable parameter normally obtained from experimental data.<br />
For a polar-nonpolar mixture G12= -0.22. The Reid et al. [118] model give the thermal<br />
conductivity with a mean error of less then 5%.<br />
C.2.2 Vapor dynamic viscosity of mixtures<br />
The viscosity of a gas mixture can be approximated by using the principle of the kinetic<br />
theory (Reid et al. [118]) as<br />
ηm = η o m + ∆η , (C.41)<br />
where η o m is the mixture gas viscosity at a low pressure and ∆η is a correction factor for<br />
the high pressure viscosity<br />
η o n yiηG,i<br />
m = nj=1 yiφij<br />
i=1<br />
, (C.42)<br />
where yi is the mole fraction of the component i and ηi is the viscosity of the pure<br />
component i. φij is a parameter which may be estimated as<br />
φij =<br />
<br />
1 + (ηG,i/ηG,j) 0.5 ( Mj/ Mi) 0.25 2<br />
[8(1 + Mi/ Mj)] 0.5<br />
φji = ηG,j<br />
ηG,i<br />
Mj<br />
, (C.43)<br />
φij . (C.44)<br />
Mi<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
154 C Physical properties<br />
The high pressure correction term is estimated as<br />
∆η =<br />
<br />
0.497.10−6 exp(1.439ρr,m) − exp(−1.111ρ1.858 r,m ) <br />
T 1/6<br />
c,m M −0.5<br />
m p −2/3<br />
c,m<br />
The pseudo critical properties of the mixture are calculated as<br />
Tc,m = <br />
yjTc,j, υc,m = <br />
j=1<br />
j=1<br />
j<br />
yjυc,j,<br />
υc,m<br />
Zc,j<br />
= pc,jυc,j<br />
,<br />
RTc,j<br />
υc,m<br />
. (C.45)<br />
Zm<br />
= <br />
yj Zc,j, (C.46)<br />
Mm = <br />
yj Mm/1000<br />
Mj, ρc,m = , ρr,m = ρm<br />
, pc,m = RTc,m Zc,m<br />
, (C.47)<br />
where T is in K, p is in Mpa, υc,m is in m 3 /kmol, ρr,m is in kg/m 3 , M is in g/mol and ηm<br />
is in kg/ms. The error associated with this model is seldom exceeded 3 to 4% (Perry and<br />
Green [112]).<br />
C.2.3 Liquid thermal conductivity of mixtures<br />
Reid et al. [118] have recommended a Filippov-like model for the prediction of the thermal<br />
conductivity of a liquid mixture as<br />
λm =<br />
j<br />
υc,m<br />
2<br />
XiλL,i − 0.72X1 X2|λL,2 − λL,1| , (C.48)<br />
i=1<br />
where X1 and X2 is the weight fraction of the component 1 and 2 respectively and λ1 and<br />
λ2 is the thermal conductivity of the component 1 and 2 in W/mK respectively.<br />
C.2.4 Vapor thermal conductivity of mixtures<br />
The thermal conductivity of a low-pressure gas mixture can be determined from the<br />
relationship given by Reid et al. [118]<br />
λG,m =<br />
n<br />
i=1<br />
yiλG,i<br />
nj=1 yiAij<br />
, (C.49)<br />
where λG,m is the low-pressure gas mixture thermal conductivity, λG,i is the low-pressure<br />
thermal conductivity of the pure component i. For a binary mixture of two non-polar<br />
gases or a non-polar and a polar gas, Aij may be calculated by the model given by Perry<br />
and Green [112] as<br />
with<br />
λtr,i<br />
λtr,j<br />
Aij =<br />
<br />
1 + (λtr,i/λtr,j) 0.5 ( Mj/ Mi) 0.25 2<br />
[8(1 + Mi/ Mj)] 0.5<br />
= Γj exp(0.0464Tr,i) − exp(−0.2412Tr,i)<br />
Γi exp(0.0464Tr,j) − exp(−0.2412Tr,j)<br />
where M is the molecular weight and Γ is defined as<br />
Γi = 210<br />
Tc,i M 3 i<br />
P 4 ci<br />
(1/6)<br />
, (C.50)<br />
, (C.51)<br />
, (C.52)<br />
where T is in K, p is in bar, M is in g/mol and λ is in W/mK. This model yields an error<br />
of less than 5% in the prediction of the thermal conductivity of the gas mixture.<br />
Dr. Ali A. Rabah, Dept of Chemeng, U of K, Email : rabahss@hotamil.com
C.3 Software packages 155<br />
C.2.5 Surface tension of mixtures<br />
Lucas and Luckas [92] in VDI-Wärmeatlas [157] recommended the following method for<br />
calculation of the mixture surface tension<br />
nm 1 − tr,m<br />
bm , (C.53)<br />
where<br />
bi = 0.1196.<br />
σm = p 2/3<br />
c,mT 1/3<br />
c,m<br />
<br />
am<br />
1 + Ts,ri ln(pc,m/1.01325)<br />
1 − Ts,ri<br />
j=1<br />
j<br />
<br />
, bm = xibi , (C.54)<br />
am = 1, nm = 11/9, Tc,m = <br />
xiTc,j, υc,m = <br />
xjυc,j, Zc,j<br />
= pc,jυc,j<br />
, (C.55)<br />
j<br />
υc,m<br />
RTc,j<br />
Zm = <br />
xj Zc,j, pc,m = RTc,m Zc,m<br />
, Ts,ri = Tb,i<br />
, (C.56)<br />
where Tb,i=T (p=1.01325 bar) is the normal boiling point temperature of the pure component<br />
i. T is in K, p is in bar and σ is in N/m. The Lucas and Luckas correlation yields<br />
an error of